Sony PM-0220 GSM/UMTS/LTE Mobile Phone with WLAN, BT, RFID User Manual
Sony Mobile Communications Inc GSM/UMTS/LTE Mobile Phone with WLAN, BT, RFID
Sony >
Contents
- 1. User Manual
- 2. Safety Leaflet
User Manual
’13.1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of "SO-02E".
For proper use of the SO-02E, read this manual
carefully before and while you use the SO-02E.
About manuals of SO-02E
In addition to this manual, the operations of SO-02E
are described in "
クイックスタートガイド
(Quick Start
Guide)" (in Japanese only) and "Instruction Manual"
application of the terminal (in Japanese only).
●
"
クイックスタートガイド
(Quick Start Guide)"
(Supplied accessories)
The initial operations and settings after purchasing
the terminal, screen view contents and operations of
main function are explained. (In Japanese only)
●
"Instruction Manual" (Application of the terminal)
Similarly to this manual, operations and settings of
each function are explained. To use "Instruction
Manual" application, from the Home screen, tap
and [Instruction Manual]. When using for the first time
or reinstalling, download and install the application
according to the onscreen instructions. You can use
the application as an electronic book. You can also
shift to actual operations by tapping the description
in the contents or view reference contents. (In
Japanese only)
❖
Note
･
For downloading or updating the application, a high
packet communication charge will be applied
because of a large amount data communication. For
this reason, subscription of packet flat-rate service is
highly recommended.
* If you use Wi-Fi function to download, packet
communication charges are not applied.
●
"Instruction Manual" (PDF file)
Operations and settings of each function are
explained. It can be downloaded from NTT DOCOMO
website.
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/
trouble/manual/download/index.html
* You can download the latest information of
"
クイックスタートガイド
(Quick Start Guide)"
(in Japanese only). The URL and contents are
subject to change without prior notice.
❖
Note
･
Reproduction or reprint of all or part of this manual
without prior permission is prohibited.
･
Important information for SO-02E is posted in the
following website. Be sure to check before using.
http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/support/use_support/
product/so-02e/ (in Japanese only)
●
スマホなるほどツアーズ
for docomo with series
"Tips of smartphone for docomo with series"
(Widget in the terminal)
An widget with which you can easily learn useful
functions and basic operations you should know with
Docomodake.
To use Tips of smartphone for docomo with series,
from the Home screen, tap .
1
Operation descriptions
In this manual, each key operation is described with
p
,
x
,
y
,
r
,
m
. And selection
operations of the icons or function items on the
touch panel are described as follows.
❖
Information
･
In this manual, the instructions are described with
the default Home screen. If you set the other
application to the home screen, the operations may
differ from the descriptions.
･
Display examples and illustrations used in this
manual are just images for explanations and may be
different from actual ones.
･
In this manual, the easier procedure is described for
the functions and settings which have multiple
operating procedures.
･
Please note that "SO-02E" is called "the terminal" in
this manual.
･
In this manual, explanations for "docomo" as Home
application are provided. To switch the Home
applications, see "Learning Home screen" (P.60).
Description Operation
From the Home
screen, tap and
tap
[Settings]
u
[About
phone].
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications button), and then
tap "Settings" on the next screen
and "About phone" on the
following screen in order.
Touch and hold an
icon.
Keep touching an icon longer (1-
2 seconds).
2
･
クイックスタートガイド
(Quick Start Guide)
(In Japanese only)
･
SO-02E
のご利用にあたっての注意事項
安全上／取り扱い上のご注意
(Notes on usage Safety/Handling
precautions) (In Japanese only)
･
Battery Pack SO06
･
1Seg antenna cable SO01
(with manual)
･
microSD card (2GB)
*
(Sample)
(with manual)
* Inserted in the terminal when purchased.
･
Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)
(with manual)
For details on optional devices, see "Optional
and related devices" (P.231).
Supplied accessories
Supplied accessories
･
SO-02E (with warranty) Back cover SO20
クイック
スタート
ガイド
Contents/Precautions
3
Contents
■
Supplied accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
■
About using the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
■
Safety Precautions (Always follow these
directions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
■
Handling precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Before Using the Terminal . . . 22
Part names and functions................................................22
docomo mini UIM card .....................................................23
microSD card ...........................................................................24
Battery pack..............................................................................25
Charging.....................................................................................26
Turning power on/off.........................................................30
Initial settings (Setup guide) ..........................................31
Status bar ...................................................................................33
Notification panel .................................................................35
Notification LED .....................................................................36
Basic operations.....................................................................36
Searching information in the terminal and web
pages ............................................................................................39
Character entry.......................................................................40
Setting character entry......................................................53
Setting Japanese keyboard.............................................53
USB keyboard/Bluetooth keyboard...........................59
docomo Palette UI. . . . . . . . . . . 60
Home screen............................................................................60
Application screen................................................................66
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Making/Receiving a call ....................................................77
Call history .................................................................................82
Call settings .............................................................................. 84
Phonebook ............................................................................... 85
Mail/Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . 96
sp-mode mail .......................................................................... 96
Message (SMS)........................................................................ 96
Email.............................................................................................. 99
Gmail.......................................................................................... 106
Google Talk............................................................................ 106
Early Warning "Area Mail".............................................. 107
Web browser ........................................................................ 108
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Viewing the setting menu............................................ 112
Wireless & networks ......................................................... 112
Device ....................................................................................... 125
Personal ................................................................................... 134
System ...................................................................................... 146
File management . . . . . . . . . . .149
Handling a file...................................................................... 149
Transferring and moving data................................... 149
Using infrared communication................................. 153
Using Bluetooth function ............................................. 156
Sharing files with DLNA devices via Connected
devices (Media server) .................................................... 159
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
dmenu ...................................................................................... 161
dmarket.................................................................................... 161
Play Store ................................................................................ 162
Osaifu-Keitai .......................................................................... 163
4
Contents/Precautions
1Seg............................................................................................ 167
FM radio ................................................................................... 174
Camera...................................................................................... 175
Playing multimedia content........................................ 193
Album........................................................................................ 195
YouTube................................................................................... 198
Connecting the terminal to TV to watch photos
and videos .............................................................................. 200
Media Player..........................................................................201
Timescape
™
......................................................................... 204
Location services................................................................ 207
Calendar................................................................................... 213
Alarm & clock........................................................................ 215
SD card backup ................................................................... 219
OfficeSuite .............................................................................. 221
International roaming . . . . . . 222
Overview of International roaming (WORLD
WING)......................................................................................... 222
Available Services............................................................... 222
Before using...........................................................................223
Making/Receiving calls in the country you stay
....................................................................................................... 226
International roaming settings.................................. 228
Appendix/Index. . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Optional and related devices ..................................... 231
Troubleshooting ................................................................. 231
Smartphone Anshin Remote Support ................. 237
Warranty and After Sales Services............................ 237
Updating software............................................................. 240
Main specification.............................................................. 243
Specific Absorption Rate of Mobile Phone, etc.
....................................................................................................... 246
End User Licence Agreement.....................................258
About Open Source Software .................................... 259
Export Controls and Regulations..............................260
Intellectual Property Right ........................................... 260
SIM unlock.............................................................................. 263
Index .......................................................................................... 264
5
Contents/Precautions
Contents/Precautions
･
SO-02E supports LTE, W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS
and Wireless LAN Systems.
･
Because a terminal operates using radio
frequencies, it cannot be used inside a tunnel,
underground, in a building or other locations
where radio waves do not reach the terminal,
in locations with weak radio wave condition,
or out of Xi/FOMA service area. The services
may not be available on high upper floors of
high-rise apartments or buildings, even if you
can see no obstructions around you. On
occasion, your calls may become
disconnected even in areas with strong radio
wave condition, even if you are not moving, or
even if there are 4-antenna marks in the
terminal's display.
･
Because your terminal uses radio waves to
communicate, it is possible that a third party
may attempt to tap your calls. However, the
LTE, W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS system
automatically scrambles all calls through a
private call feature. Therefore, even if third
party successfully intercepts your call, they
will only hear noise.
･
The terminal operates on radio frequencies by
converting voice into digital signals. If the
caller moves into an area of adverse radio
wave condition, the digital signal may not be
restored accurately, and the voice received in
the call may differ slightly from the actual
voice.
･
Note down the information saved in the
terminal in a separate note and keep it safely.
Note that DOCOMO assumes no
responsibility for any loss of saved contents of
data resulting from malfunction, repair,
changing of the model or other handling of
the terminal.
･
You are recommended to save important
data to microSD card.
･
As with PCs, some user-installed applications
may disrupt the stability of the terminal
performance, or unexpectedly transmit
information via the Internet causing improper
use of your location information as well as
personal information recorded on the
terminal. Therefore, verify the supplier and
operating conditions of the applications to be
used before using them.
･
This terminal has Xi Area, FOMA Plus-Area and
FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area support.
･
The terminal does not support i-mode sites
(programs) or i-
α
ppli.
About using the terminal
6
Contents/Precautions
･
The terminal automatically performs
communication for synchronizing data,
checking the latest software version, maintain
connection with the server, etc. If you
transmit a large amount of data such as
downloading applications or watching
movie, a packet communication charge
becomes high. Subscription of packet flat-
rate service is highly recommended.
･
Public mode (Driving mode) is not supported.
･
Setting the phone to silent mode does not
mute sounds for shutter, playback of video or
music, alarm, etc.
･
The names of the operators are displayed on
unlocking screen (P.31).
･
Your phone number (own number) can be
checked as follows:
From the Home screen, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[About phone]
u
[Status].
･
The software version of your terminal can be
checked as follows:
From the Home screen, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[About phone].
･
You can perform software update by
downloading an update file with a PC via
Internet and connecting the PC to the
terminal. For details, see "Connecting to a PC
and updating" (P.242).
･
By some software updates, the operating
system (OS) may be version-upgraded for
improving the terminal quality. For this
reason, you always need to use the latest OS
version. And some applications that used in
the previous OS version may not be available
or some unintended bugs may occur.
･
You can use the terminal only with docomo
mini UIM card. If you have a UIM or FOMA
card, bring it to a docomo Shop to replace.
･
Set the screen lock to ensure the security of
your terminal for its loss. For details, see
"Screen lock" (P.142).
･
If your terminal is lost, change your each
account password to invalidate
authentication using a PC to prevent other
persons from using Google services such as
Google Talk, Gmail, Google Play, etc.,
Facebook, Twitter and mixi.
･
Google application and service contents are
subject to change without prior notice.
･
The terminal supports only sp-mode, mopera
U and Business mopera Internet. Other
providers are not supported.
･
To use tethering, subscription of sp-mode is
required.
･
Packet communication charge when using
tethering varies depending on the charging
plan you use. Subscription of packet flat-rate
service is highly recommended.
･
For details on usage charge, etc., refer to http:/
/www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/ .
7
Contents/Precautions
Notice:
Pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law (
電波法
)
and the Japanese Telecommunications
Business Law (
電気通信事業法
), this device has
been granted a designation number
according to the
"Ordinance concerning the Technical
Regulations Conformity Certification etc. of
Specified Radio Equipment (
特定無線設備の技
術基準適合証明等に関する規則
)"
R-(W-CDMA)/Article 2-1-11-3,
R-(W-CDMA)/Article 2-1-11-7,
IEEE802.11bgn (2.4GHz)/Article 2-1-19,
IEEE802.11an (5GHz)/Article 2-1-19-3,
IEEE802.11an (5GHz)/Article 2-1-19-3-2,
LTE/Article 2-1-11-19,
BT/Article 2-1-19:
202-LSA035
and "Ordinance Concerning Technical
Conditions Compliance Approval etc. of
Terminal Equipment (
端末機器の技術基準適合
認定等に関する規則
)"
T-(W-CDMA): AD 12-0022 202
■
For safe and proper use of the terminal, please
read the "Safety Precautions" prior to use.
Keep the Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
■
ALWAYS observe the safety precautions since
they intend to prevent personal injury or
property damage.
■
The following symbols indicate the different
levels of injury or damage that may result if
the guidelines are not observed and the
terminal is used improperly.
Safety Precautions (Always
follow these directions)
Failure to
observe these
guidelines may
immediately
result in death
or serious
injury.
Failure to
observe these
guidelines may
result in death
or serious
injury.
Failure to
observe these
guidelines may
result in injury
and property
damage.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
8
Contents/Precautions
■
The following symbols indicate specific
directions.
■
"Safety Precautions" are described in the
following categories:
1. Handling the terminal, battery pack, adapter
and docomo mini UIM card (common) . . . . . . . 8
2. Handling the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. Handling battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4. Handling adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5. Handling the docomo mini UIM card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6. Handling the terminal near electronic medical
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7. Material list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1. Handling the terminal, battery
pack, adapter and docomo mini
UIM card (common)
DANGER
Do not use, store or leave the equipment in
hot places (e.g. by the fire, near a heater,
under a kotatsu, in direct sunlight, in a car in
the hot sun). (including the event that you
ware the equipment in the pocket of your
clothes, etc.)
Doing so may cause fire, burns or injury.
Do not place equipment inside cooking
appliance such as a microwave oven or high-
pressure containers.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Do not let the equipment get wet with
water, drinking water, urine of pet animals,
etc.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Use the battery pack and adapter specified
by NTT DOCOMO for your terminal.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Indicates prohibited actions.
Indicates not to disassemble.
Indicates not to use where it could
get wet.
Indicates not to handle with wet
hands.
Indicates compulsory actions in
accordance with instructions.
Indicates to remove the power plug
from the outlet.
Don’t
No disassembly
No liquids
No wet hands
Do
Unplug
Don’t
Don’t
No disassembly
No liquids
Do
9
Contents/Precautions
WARNING
Do not subject the equipment to excessive
force or throw it.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Do not allow the microUSB connecting jack
or headset connecting jack to come in
contact with conducting foreign substances
(a piece of metal, pencil lead, etc.). Never
allow these objects to get into the
connecting jack.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Do not cover or wrap the equipment with a
cloth or bedding in use or while charging.
Doing so may cause fire or burns.
Power off the terminal before you step into a
place where flammable gas can leak, such as
gas stations. Stop charging if you charge the
battery.
Gas may catch fire.
When using Osaifu-Keitai in a place such as a
gas station, turn OFF the terminal before using
it.
(When Osaifu-Keitai lock is activated,
deactivate it before turning OFF the terminal.)
If you notice anything unusual about the
equipment such as an unusual odor,
overheating, discoloration or deformation
during operation, charging or storage,
immediately perform the following
measures.
・
Remove the power plug from the power
outlet or cigarette lighter.
・
Power off the terminal.
・
Remove the battery pack from the
terminal.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not place on an unstable or inclined
platform.
Doing so may cause the device to fall and
cause injury.
Do not keep in a place that is very humid,
dusty, or subject to high temperature.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
If children use the terminal, parents or
guardians should give them the proper
instructions for use. Make sure that they use
the terminal as instructed.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
Keep the equipment out of the reach of
babies and infants.
Failure to do so may cause accidental
swallowing or injury.
Be careful especially when using the
terminal connected to the adapter
continuously for a long time.
If you play a game, watch 1Seg, etc. for a long
time while charging, the temperature of the
terminal, battery pack and AC adapter may
rise.
If you are directly in contact with hot parts for
a long period of time, it may cause your skin to
become red, itchy, or develop a rash
depending on your physical condition and
also it may cause low-temperature burn.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
10
Contents/Precautions
2. Handling the terminal
WARNING
Do not direct the infrared data port toward
your eye and transmit signals.
Doing so may cause harmful effect your eyes.
Do not direct the infrared data port toward
home electric appliances etc. equipped with
infrared device when using infrared
communication.
Doing so may cause an accident because of
erroneous operation of infrared device.
Do not turn on the light with the lighting
luminescence part close to the eyes.
Especially to shoot infants or young
children, step away from them 1 m or more.
Doing so may cause blurred vision. Or injury
by dazzling eyes or surprising may occur.
Do not allow a foreign substance such as
water and other liquids, metal parts, or
flammables to get in the docomo mini UIM
card or microSD card insertion slot on the
terminal.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
Do not turn on the light toward a driver of a
car etc.
Doing so may disturb driving and cause an
accident.
Power off the terminal in a place where the
use is prohibited such as in airplane or
hospital.
Failure to do so may affect electronic
equipment and electronic medical
equipment.
Follow the instructions of each medical facility
for the use of mobile phones on their
premises.
Prohibited acts such as mobile phone usage
on board an airplane may be punished by law.
If usage of mobile phones in an aircraft is
admitted by setting airplane mode, etc., use
the terminal under the direction of the airline.
If the microUSB cable is connected into the
USB connecting jack for charging etc., the
terminal is automatically powered on
although the operations are not available. Be
careful not to connect the microUSB cable in a
place where the use is prohibited such as in
airplane or hospital.
Always keep the terminal away from your
ear when you talk setting the hands-free
function.
Also, when you play game, play back music,
etc. connecting the Earphone/Microphone,
etc. to the terminal, adjust the volume
adequately.
If the volume is too loud, it may cause
difficulty in hearing.
Moreover, if you barely hear the surrounding
sounds, it may cause an accident.
If you have a weak heart, set the vibrator or
ringtone volume carefully.
Failure to do so may affect your heart.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
11
Contents/Precautions
If you are wearing any electronic medical
equipment, check with the relevant medical
electronic equipment manufacturer or
vendor whether the operation may be
affected by radio waves.
The radio waves from the terminal may affect
electronic medical equipment.
Power off the terminal near electronic
devices or equipment operating on high
precision control or weak signals.
Failure to do so may interfere with the
operation of electronic devices or equipment.
* The followings are some electronic devices
or equipment that you should be careful of:
Hearing aids, implantable cardiac
pacemaker, implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, other electronic medical
equipment, fire detector, automatic door,
and other automatically controlled devices
or equipment.
If you use an implantable cardiac
pacemaker, implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, or other electronic medical
equipment, check with the relevant medical
electronic equipment manufacturer or
vendor whether the operation can be
affected by radio waves.
Be careful about broken glasses or exposed
internal from the terminal if the display or
the camera lens is broken.
Shatterproof film-applied hardened glass is
used on the display surface and the acrylic
resin is applied on camera lens so as not to be
shattered when broken. But they may cause
injury if you touch a cut surface or exposed
portion mistakenly.
CAUTION
Do not swing the terminal around by
holding a strap etc.
The terminal may hit you or others and cause
accident such as injury.
Do not use damaged terminal.
Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or
electric shock.
When using the motion sensor, check the
safety around you, hold the terminal firmly,
and do not shake it unnecessarily.
May cause accident such as injuries.
If the display is mistakenly damaged and
when the liquid crystal runs out, do not get
it on your skin such as face, hands, etc.
Doing so may cause blindness or injury on
your skin.
If the liquid crystal gets in your eye or mouth,
rinse with clean running water, and get
medical treatment immediately.
Also, if it gets on your skin or clothes, use
something such as alcohol to wipe off and
wash it with soap in clear water.
To use the terminal in car, check with
automobile manufacturer or dealer to
determine how the device is affected by
radio waves before using.
In rare cases, using the phone in some vehicle
models can cause the vehicle's electronic
equipment to malfunction. In that case, stop
using the terminal immediately.
Do
Do
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
12
Contents/Precautions
The use of the terminal may cause itching,
rashes, eczema, or other symptoms
depending on the user's physical condition.
Immediately stop using and get medical
treatment in such a case.
For material of each part
→
P.15 "Material list"
When watching the display, take a certain
distance from the display in a fully bright
place.
Failure to do so may reduce visual acuity.
3. Handling battery pack
■
Check that the battery type matches the type
displayed on the battery pack label.
DANGER
Do not connect a wire or other metal objects
to the jack. And, do not carry or store the
terminal with objects like a metal necklace.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
Check the orientation of the battery pack to
attach to the terminal, and do not try to
force the battery pack onto the terminal if
you are having trouble attaching it.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
Do not throw the terminal into fire.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
Do not stick a nail into the terminal, hit it
with a hammer, or step on it.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
If the battery pack's fluid etc. contacts eyes,
immediately flush the eyes with clean water
and see a doctor right away. Do not rub the
eyes.
Failure to do so may cause blindness.
WARNING
If the battery pack seems to have
abnormalities such as deformation or
scratches due to falling, never use it.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
If the battery pack leaks or gives off a
strange smell, immediately remove it from
the vicinity of open flames.
The leaking liquid may ignite fire, catch fire, or
explode.
Be careful not to let your pet bite the battery
pack.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
CAUTION
Do not discard the battery pack together
with other garbage.
Doing so may cause igniting or environmental
destruction. Tape the terminals of old battery
packs to insulate them, and then bring them
into a sales outlet such as docomo Shop. If
your local municipality has a battery recycling
program, dispose of them as provided for.
Display Type of Battery
Li-ion 00 Lithium Ion Battery
Do
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Do
Do
Don’t
13
Contents/Precautions
Do not use or charge a wet battery pack.
Doing so may cause battery pack to ignite,
burst, heat or leak.
If fluid etc. leaks out from the battery pack,
do not make the fluid contact with your skin
of face or hands.
Doing so may cause blindness or injury on
your skin.
If the fluid etc. gets into your eyes or mouth, or
contacts skin or clothes, immediately flush the
contacted area with clean running water.
If the fluid gets into the eyes or mouth,
immediately see a doctor after flushing.
4. Handling adapter
WARNING
Do not use the adapter cord if it gets
damaged.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
Do not use the AC adapter in a very humid
place such as bathroom.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
DC adapter is only for a negative ground
vehicle. Do not use DC adapter for a positive
ground vehicle.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
Do not touch the adapter if you hear
thunder.
Doing so may cause electric shock.
Do not short-circuit the microUSB plug
while it is connected to the power outlet or
cigarette lighter socket. Do not touch the
microUSB plug with your hands, fingers, or
any part of your body.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
Do not place heavy objects on the adapter
cord.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
When you insert and remove the AC adapter
from power outlet, do not contact a metal
strap or other metal objects with the jack.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
Do not touch the adapter cord or outlet with
wet hands.
Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric
shock.
Use the adapter only on the specified power
supply and voltage.
When charging the terminal overseas, use
AC adapter for global use.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
AC adapter : AC 100 V
DC adapter : DC 12 V or 24 V (only for a
negative-ground vehicle)
AC adapter for global use : AC 100 V to 240 V
(Make sure to connect the adapter to a
household AC power outlet.)
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
No wet hands
Do
14
Contents/Precautions
When the fuse in a DC adapter is blown,
make sure to use the specified fuse.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock. For the specified fuse, see the
users manuals that supplied with a DC
adapter.
Clean dust from the power plug.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
When you connect the AC adapter to the
power outlet, insert it firmly.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
When you disconnect the power plug from
the outlet or cigarette lighter socket, do not
pull the adapter cord with excessive force.
Instead, hold the adapter to disconnect.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
Always remove the power plug from the
outlet or cigarette lighter when not using
the adapter for an extended period.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
Immediately remove the power plug from
the outlet or cigarette lighter socket if water
or other fluids get into the adapter.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
Before cleaning, remove the power plug
from the power outlet or the cigarette
lighter socket.
Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or
electric shock.
5. Handling the docomo mini UIM
card
CAUTION
Be careful of the cut surface when removing
docomo mini UIM card.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
6. Handling the terminal near
electronic medical equipment
■
The following instructions observe the
guidelines of the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Conference, Japan to protect
electronic medical equipment from radio
waves from mobile phones.
WARNING
Please observe the following guidelines in
medical facilities.
・
Do not take the terminal into the operating
rooms, ICU (Intensive Care Unit), or CCU
(Coronary Care Unit).
・
Power off the terminal inside hospital wards.
・
Power off the terminal in the lobby and
other places if there are any electronic
medical equipment operating in the vicinity.
・
Follow the instructions of each medical
facility when they specify areas forbidding to
use and carrying a mobile phone.
Do
Do
Do
Do
Unplug
Unplug
Unplug
Do
Do
15
Contents/Precautions
Power off the terminal in crowded places
such as rush-hour trains. There may be a
person with an implantable cardiac
pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator near you.
The radio waves from the terminal may affect
the operation of implantable cardiac
pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator.
If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker
or implantable cardioverter defibrillator,
keep the terminal 22 cm or more away from
the implant at all times.
The radio waves from the terminal may affect
the performance of electronic medical
equipment.
If you need to use electronic medical
equipment other than implantable cardiac
pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator outside medical facilities such
as treating at home, check with the relevant
medical electronic equipment manufacturer
whether the operation may be affected by
radio waves.
The radio waves from the terminal may affect
the performance of electronic medical
equipment.
7. Material list
Do
Do
Do
Part Material Surface
treatment
Exterior case
(cover : front)
PA resin (with
glass)
＋
AL
plate
Discontinuous
evaporation
coating (tin) +
UV coating
Exterior case
(panel : rear
transparent plate
display)
PC resin
(with glass)
UV coating
Exterior case
(panel : front)
PC resin
(with glass)
UV coating
Exterior case
(cover : bottom)
PC resin
(with glass)
Discontinuous
evaporation
coating (tin) +
UV coating
Exterior case
(cover : rear)
PA resi n
(with glass)
UV coating
Exterior case
(panel : rear)
(terminal color :
Black)
PC resin
(with glass)
Urethan coating
Exterior case
(panel : rear)
(terminal color :
White/Pink/Orange)
PC resin
(with glass)
UV coating
Exterior case
(back cover)
PC resin
(with glass)
UV coating
Transparent plate
(camera)
PC resin +
PMMA resin
Hard coating
＋
AR treatment
Transparent plate
(photo light)
PMMA resin Hard coating
16
Contents/Precautions
■
Common precautions
･
Do not allow the terminal to get wet.
The terminal, battery pack, adapter and docomo
mini UIM card are not waterproof. Do not use in
a bathroom or other highly humid area or do not
let rain touch. Or putting the terminal on your
body, humidity of sweat may cause internal
corrosion and malfunction. Note that
malfunctions, which are determined to be
caused by water as result of inspections, are
outside the scope of the warranty. Since these
conditions are outside of the scope of the
warranty, a repair, if at all possible, is charged.
･
Clean the terminal with a dry soft cloth
(such as used for cleaning eyeglasses).
- Do not rub it roughly with a dry cloth. The
display may be damaged.
- Drops of water or dirt left on the display may
cause stains.
- Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzine, cleaning
detergent, etc. to clean the terminal. These
chemicals may erase the printing on the
terminal or cause discoloration.
･
Clean the terminals occasionally with a
dry cotton swab.
If the jack is soiled, connection gets worse and it
may cause power to be turned off or insufficient
battery charge, so clean the jack with a dry
cotton swab etc. When cleaning, be careful not
to damage the terminals.
Transparent plate
(display)
Glass + PET
resin
Hard coating
Side keys
(power key, volume
key) (terminal color :
Pink/Orange)
PC resin UV coating
Side keys
(power key, volume
key) (terminal color :
Black/White)
PC resin
―
Battery pack
(contacts)
Copper alloy First nickel
plating/Gold
plating
Battery pack (body
(top case))
PA resi n
―
Battery pack (body
(bottom case))
PC resin
―
Battery pack
(label)
PET resin UV coating
Part Material Surface
treatment
Handling precautions
17
Contents/Precautions
･
Do not leave the terminal near the air
conditioning vent.
Extreme temperature changes may produce
condensation and corrode the internal parts of
the terminal, causing it to malfunction.
･
Make sure to use the terminal, battery
pack, etc. without excessive force.
If you put the terminal in a bag full of items or sit
down with the terminal in the pocket of your
cloth, it may damage the display, internal circuit
board and battery pack, causing malfunction.
Also, while the external device is connected to
the microUSB connecting jack or headset
connecting jack, it may damage the connector
and cause malfunction.
･
Do not rub or scratch the display with
metal.
The display may get scratched and it may cause
malfunction or damage.
･
Read the users manuals supplied with
optional devices.
■
The terminal precautions
･
Do not press touch panel surface
forcibly, or not operate with a sharp-
pointed objects such as nail, ballpoint
pen, pin, etc.
Doing so may cause damage of touch panel.
･
Do not use the terminal in extremely hot
or cold places.
Use the terminal where the temperature ranges
between 5
℃
and 35
℃
and humidity ranges
between 45% and 85%.
･
Using the terminal near ordinary phone,
television or radio may cause
interference in these electric appliances.
Make sure to move far away from them
when using the terminal.
･
Note down the information saved in the
terminal in a separate note and keep it
safely.
Under no condition will DOCOMO be held liable
for any damaged or lost data saved in the
terminal.
･
Do not drop or give a strong impact to
the terminal.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage.
･
Do not plug the connector of the
external device into the microUSB
connecting jack or headset connecting
jack at the slant or pull it while
connecting.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage.
･
The terminal could become warm while
in use and charging. This condition is
not abnormal. You can continue using
the terminal.
･
Do not leave the camera under direct
sunlight.
If you do so, some of the elements may melt or
become faded.
･
Do not use the terminal with the back
cover removed.
Doing so may cause removal of battery pack,
malfunction or damage.
18
Contents/Precautions
･
Do not remove the microSD card or
power off the terminal while using the
microSD card.
Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.
･
Do not let magnetic cards, etc. close to
the terminal.
The magnetic data in cash cards, credit cards,
telephone cards, floppy disks, etc. may be erased.
･
Do not bring strong magnetic objects
close to the terminal.
Strong magnetic objects may cause
misoperation.
■
Battery pack
･
The battery pack is a consumable
accessory.
Replace the battery pack if the terminal has
extremely short operation time on a full charge,
though it may vary by operating conditions.
Purchase a new battery pack of the specified
type.
･
Charge the battery pack in an
environment with the proper ambient
temperature (5
℃
to 35
℃
).
･
The operating time of the battery pack
varies depending on the operating
environment and the secular
degradation of the battery pack.
･
The battery pack may swell out as it
comes to near the end of its lifetime
depending on the usage conditions, but
it is not a problem.
･
Be careful especially about the
following points when preserving the
battery pack.
- The battery is fully charged (immediately after
the charging is complete)
- The battery has run out (the phone cannot
power on)
The performance and life of the battery pack may
deteriorate.
It is recommended that you store the internal
battery with the remaining battery level of about
40% as a guide.
■
The adapter precautions
･
Charge the battery pack in an
environment with the proper ambient
temperature (5
℃
to 35
℃
).
･
Do not charge in the following places.
- Places that are very humid, dusty or exposed to
strong vibrations.
- Near ordinary phone or TV/radio.
･
The adapter cable could become warm
while charging. This condition is not
abnormal. You can continue using the
terminal.
･
When using the DC adapter for
charging, do not turn off the vehicle
engine.
Doing so may cause the vehicle battery run out.
･
When you use the power outlet with a
mechanism to prevent the plug from
being removed, follow the instructions
on the outlet's user's manual.
19
Contents/Precautions
･
Do not give a strong impact to the
adapter. Also, do not bend or deform
the microUSB plug.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
■
docomo mini UIM card
･
Do not use unnecessary force to insert/
remove the docomo mini UIM card.
･
Note that DOCOMO assumes no
responsibility for malfunctions
occurring as the result of inserting and
using docomo mini UIM card with
another IC card reader/writer.
･
Always keep the IC portion clean when
you use the card.
･
Clean the terminal with a dry soft cloth
(such as used for cleaning eyeglasses).
･
Note down the information saved in the
docomo mini UIM card in a separate
note and keep it safely.
Under no condition will DOCOMO be held liable
for any damaged or lost data saved in the
terminal.
･
Take an expended docomo mini UIM
card to sales outlet such as docomo
Shop for proper disposal in order to
protect the environment.
･
Do not carelessly damage, contact, or
short-circuit an IC.
Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.
･
Do not drop a docomo mini UIM card or
subject it to impact.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
･
Do not bend a docomo mini UIM card or
place a heavy object on it.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
･
Do not insert the docomo mini UIM card
on which any label or seal is stuck into
the terminal.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
■
Bluetooth function precautions
･
To secure the Bluetooth communication
security, the terminal supports the
security function compliant with
Bluetooth standards, but the security
may not be sufficient depending on the
setting. Concern about the
communication using the Bluetooth
function.
･
Please be aware that DOCOMO is not
responsible for data leak when making
data communications using Bluetooth.
20
Contents/Precautions
･
Frequency band
The frequency band used by the terminal's
Bluetooth/wireless LAN function is written on the
battery pack compartment. The label can be read
as follows.
･
Bluetooth cautions
The operating frequency band of the terminal is
used by industrial, scientific, consumer and
medical equipment including microwave ovens,
premises radio stations for identifying mobile
units used in the manufacturing lines of plants
(radio stations requiring a license), specified low
power radio stations (radio stations requiring no
license) and amateur radio stations (hereinafter
referred to as "another station").
- Before using this equipment, confirm that
"another station" is not being operated nearby.
- In the event of the terminal causing harmful
radio wave interference with "another station",
promptly change the operating frequency or
stop radio wave emission by turning off the
power, etc.
- If you have further questions, contact "General
Inquiries" on the last page of this manual.
■
Wireless LAN (WLAN) precautions
･
Wireless LAN (WLAN) exchanges
information using radio waves, and
allows you to freely establish LAN
connection if you are within an area
where radio wave reaches. On the other
side, if you communicate without
appropriate security settings,
communications may be intercepted or
hacked by malicious parties. It is
recommended to make necessary
security settings on your responsibility
and expense.
2.4 : This radio equipment uses the 2400 MHz
band.
FH/XX/DS/OF
：
Modulation scheme is the
FH-SS, other system, DS-SS,
or OFDM system.
1 : The estimated interference distance is 10
m or less.
4 : The estimated interference distance is 40
m or less.
8 : The estimated interference distance is 80
m or less.
: The full band between 2400 MHz
and 2483.5 MHz is used and the
band of the mobile identification
device can be avoided.
Available channels vary depending on the
country.
For use in an aircraft, contact the airline
beforehand.
21
Contents/Precautions
･
Wireless LAN
Do not use wireless LAN near magnetic devices
such as electrical appliances or AV/OA devices, or
in radio waves.
- Magnetism or radio waves may increase noises
or disable communications (especially when
using a microwave oven).
- When used near TV, radio, etc., reception
interference may occur, or channels on the TV
screen may be disturbed.
- If there are multiple wireless LAN access points
nearby and the same channel is used, search
may not work correctly.
･
2.4 GHz device cautions
The operating frequency band of the WLAN
device is used by industrial, scientific, consumer
and medical equipment including home electric
appliances such as microwave ovens, premises
radio stations for identifying mobile units used in
the manufacturing lines of plants (radio stations
requiring a license), specified low power radio
stations (radio stations requiring no license) and
amateur radio stations (radio stations requiring a
license).
- Before using the device, confirm that premises
radio stations for identifying mobile units,
specified low power radio stations and amateur
radio stations are not being operated nearby.
- If the device causes harmful radio interference
to premises radio stations for identifying
mobile units, immediately change the
frequency band or stop use, and contact
"General Inquiries" on the last page of this
manual for crosstalk avoidance, etc. (e.g.
partition setup).
- If the device causes radio interference to
specified low power radio stations or amateur
radio stations, contact "General Inquiries" on
the last page of this manual.
･
5GHz device cautions
5GHz wireless LAN device is prohibited to use
outdoor by Law.
■
FeliCa reader/writer function
precautions
･
FeliCa reader/writer function of the
terminal uses weak waves requiring no
licenses for radio stations.
･
It uses 13.56 MHz frequency band.
When using other reader/writers in your
surroundings, keep the terminal away
sufficiently from them. Before using the
FeliCa reader/writer, confirm that there
are no radio stations using the same
frequency band nearby.
22
Contents/Precautions
■
Note
･
Do not use altered terminal. Using an
altered device is a violation of the Radio
Law.
A "Technical Conformity Mark " affixed on the
manufacturer's specification sticker certifies that
the terminal meets technical regulations for
specified radio equipment that are based on the
Radio Law.
If you remove the screws and alter the inside of
the terminal, the technical regulations
conformity certification becomes invalid.
Do not use the terminal with the certification
invalid, as it is a violation of the Radio Law.
･
Be careful when using the terminal
while driving.
Using a handheld mobile phone while driving
will result in a penalty.
However, absolutely necessary cases such as
rescue of a sick person or maintaining public's
safety are exempted.
･
Use the FeliCa reader/writer function
only in Japan.
FeliCa reader/writer function of the terminal
conforms to Japanese radio standards. If you use
this function overseas, you may be punished.
･
Do not alter the basic software illegally.
It is regarded as the software modification and
Repairs may be refused.
23
Before Using the Terminal
a
Front camera lens
b
Ear speaker
c
Proximity sensor : Turns on or off the touch screen
to prevent misoperation during a call.
d
Light sensor : Used for auto controlling of the screen
brightness.
e
Notification LED
f
Touch screen
g
Microphone
h
Infrared data port
i
Camera lens
j
Flash/Photo light
k
NFC/FeliCa antenna section
*
l
FOMA/Xi/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna section
*
m
Second microphone : Reduce noise to make easy to
listen.
n
mark
o
Back cover
p
FOMA/Xi antenna section
*
q
Connector for microUSB cable
r
microSD card slot
s
Connecting jack for the desktop holder
t
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi/GPS antenna section
*
u
docomo mini UIM card slot
v
Power key/Screen lock key
w
Volume key/Zoom key
x
Speaker
y
Headset connector
z
Strap hole
* The antenna is built into the main body. Covering
around the antenna with your hand may affect the
quality of communications.
Part names and functions
k
j
p
o
l
m
n
y
z
q
r
u
t
w
v
x
s
a b dce
g
f
h i
24
Before Using the Terminal
❖
Note
･
Do not put stickers etc. on each sensors.
･
Do not remove the sticker attached to the back side
of the back cover. Removal of the sticker may disable
reading/writing of IC card.
The docomo mini UIM card is an IC card
recorded user information such as your
phone number etc.
･
You can use the terminal with docomo mini
UIM card. If you have a UIM or FOMA card,
bring it to a docomo Shop to replace.
･
When docomo mini UIM card is not inserted
to the terminal, some functions are not
available.
･
For details on docomo mini UIM card, refer to
the docomo mini UIM card manual.
･
When inserting/removing the docomo mini
UIM card, make sure to power off the terminal.
Do not connect the AC adapter.
❖
Information
･
Please be careful not to touch or scratch a metal part
(IC) when you handle the docomo mini UIM card.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage.
■
Security codes of the docomo mini
UIM card
There is a security code called PIN code in
the docomo mini UIM card. The code is set
to "0000" at subscription, which you can
change by yourself. (P.141)
docomo mini UIM card
25
Before Using the Terminal
1
Hook the groove at the side of the
back cover with the tip of thumb,
and pick up the back cover in the
direction of the arrow ( ) to
remove.
2
Remove the battery pack and
microSD card, hook the tab ( ) on
the tray with the tip of finger to
pull out the tray straight, and
insert docomo mini UIM card all
the way into the tray straight with
the metal (IC) part facing down.
･
Check the orientation of corner cut.
1
Remove the back cover, and then
the battery pack and microSD
card, hook the tab ( ) on the tray
with the tip of finger to pull out
the tray straight, then take out the
docomo mini UIM card.
Inserting docomo mini UIM
card
Removing docomo mini UIM
card
切り欠き
ドコモminiUIMカード
26
Before Using the Terminal
You can use microSD card for any other
compatible devices.
･
The terminal supports microSD card of up to
2GB, and microSDHC card of up to 32GB (As of
July, 2012).
･
For compatible microSD cards, contact
manufacturers of microSD cards.
･
When inserting/removing a microSD card,
make sure to power off the terminal. Do not
connect the AC adapter.
1
Hook the groove at the side of the
back cover with the tip of thumb,
and pick up the back cover in the
direction of the arrow ( ) to
remove.
2
Remove the battery pack, and
check the orientation of microSD
card to insert it slowly straight into
the holder.
･
Insert the microSD card with metal
contacts side down.
microSD card
Inserting microSD card
27
Before Using the Terminal
1
Remove the back cover and the
battery pack, and side the microSD
card out to remove while pressing
it with the tip of finger.
The battery pack is not full charged when you
purchased the terminal.
The following is the time for charging an
empty battery pack. Charging under low
temperature requires longer time.
The following time varies by the battery pack
condition or operating environment. For
details, see (P.244).
Removing microSD card
Charging
Charging time
AC Adapter 03 (Optional) Approx. 150 min.
DC Adapter 03 (Optional) Approx. 160 min.
Operation time on full charge
(estimate)
Continuous
stand-by time
FOMA/3G Approx. 360 hrs.
(stationary)
GSM Approx. 280 hrs.
(stationary)
LTE Approx. 240 hrs.
(stationary)
Continuous
call time
FOMA/3G Approx. 350 min.
GSM Approx. 360 min.
28
Before Using the Terminal
･
The battery pack is a consumable part. The
usage duration of the battery per one charge
decreases gradually each time the battery is
recharged.
･
When the usage duration per one charge
becomes about half of a new battery pack,
the life of the battery pack is assumed to be
almost over. It is recommended that you
replace the battery pack ahead of time. The
battery pack may swell out as it comes to near
the end of its lifetime depending on the
usage conditions, but it is not a problem.
･
Always attach the SO-02E dedicated battery
pack SO06 to charge.
･
The AC Adapter 03 (optional) is compatible
with AC 100 V to 240 V. For using the terminal
overseas, a plug adapter that fits the electrical
outlets in the country you stay is needed. Do
not use an electrical transformer for overseas
use to charge the terminal.
･
It is recommended to use the AC Adapter 03
(optional) for charging.
･
When you start charging, notification LED on
the terminal turns red/orange/green, and
green light indicates that the battery level has
reached 90 % or more. From the Home screen,
tap and [Settings]
u
[About
phone]
u
[Status] to check "Battery level" for
the status of charging. When charging is
complete, battery level is displayed as "100%".
･
When you start charging the battery with the
terminal powered off, the power turns on.
However, you cannot operate the terminal.
Do not charge the battery in a place where
the use is prohibited such as in airplane or
hospital.
Do not charge the battery pack for a
long time (several days)
･
If you remain charging the terminal for a long
time, the power supply starts from the battery
pack after completion of charging. The usage
time duration may be short. In that case,
please charge it again correctly. For
recharging, remove the terminal from the AC
adapter and reconnect it again.
Battery pack life
Charging
Li-ion 00
29
Before Using the Terminal
Use the compatible AC adapter for charging.
If you use a charger other than the
compatible AC adapter, charging may not be
available or operations may not be
performed correctly. (P.231)
When using AC Adapter 03 (optional) for
charging, do the following procedures.
1
Insert the microUSB cable
horizontally with the microUSB
plug engraved side facing up
into the microUSB connecting jack
of the terminal.
2
Insert a USB plug of microUSB
cable into the USB connecting jack
of the AC adapter horizontally and
insert the plug of the AC adapter
into the power outlet.
3
When the charging is complete,
remove the microUSB plug of the
microUSB cable from the terminal.
4
Remove the AC adapter from the
power outlet.
❖
Note
･
If the microUSB cable is connected into the USB
connecting jack for charging etc., the terminal is
automatically powered on although the operations
are not available. Be careful not to connect the
microUSB cable in a place where the use is
prohibited such as in a airplane or hospital.
DC Adapter 03 (optional) supplies power
from a car cigarette lighter socket (12 V/24 V).
For details, refer to the DC Adapter 03
(optional) manual.
Charging with AC adapter
Charging with DC adapter
30
Before Using the Terminal
1
Insert the microUSB cable
horizontally with the microUSB
plug engraved side facing up
into the microUSB connecting jack
of the terminal.
2
Insert the USB plug of the
microUSB cable horizontally into
the USB port of a PC.
･
When "PC Companion software" screen
appears on the terminal, tap [Skip].
･
When a screen for new hardware
detection etc. appears on the PC, select
[
キャンセル
(Cancel)].
3
When the charging is complete,
remove the microUSB plug of the
microUSB cable from the terminal.
4
Remove the USB plug of the
microUSB cable from the USB port
of the PC.
❖
Note
･
Installation of MTP driver to a PC is required to charge
the battery with a Microsoft Windows XP PC, since
"USB connection mode" is set to "Media transfer
mode (MTP)" by default. Install Windows Media
Player 10 or later to install MTP driver.
･
If the microUSB cable is connected into the USB
connecting jack for charging etc., the terminal is
automatically powered on although the operations
are not available. Be careful not to connect the
microUSB cable in a place where the use is
prohibited such as in a airplane or hospital.
･
Check the connecting direction to connect correctly.
Wrong connection may cause damage.
Charging with a PC
31
Before Using the Terminal
1
Press and hold
p
for over a
second.
･
The unlock screen appears.
2
Unlock the screen.
･
For unlocking the screen by default, see
"Unlocking the screen" (P.31).
❖
Information
･
The first time you turn on, "Initial settings (Setup
guide)" (P.31) appears.
･
If you have activated the screen lock (P.142) or SIM
card lock (P.141), unlock screen/PIN code entry
screen appears when turning power on. For
unlocking the screen lock, see "Unlocking the screen
lock" (P.143), and for unlocking SIM card lock, see
"Entering the PIN code when powered on" (P.141).
1
Press and hold
p
for over a
second.
･
A pop-up screen appears.
2
Tap [Power off ].
3
Tap [OK].
When the screen lock is set, the screen
backlight turns off. You can avoid the touch
screen or button from false operations.
･
The screen is locked with turning the screen
backlight off after the specified time duration.
1
Press
p
.
❖
Information
･
Screen lock is set to "Slide" by default. For changing
the screen lock, see "Screen lock" (P.142).
･
For details on settings for turning the backlight off
and the duration of time before the screen lock
activation, see "Adjusting the idle time before the
screen turns off" (P.127).
･
When you set screen lock to "Slide", you can check
the notifications or activate application even if you
do not unlock the screen. For details, refer to "Setting
information displayed on the unlock screen" (P.128).
Turning power on/off
Turning power on
Turning power off
Setting screen lock
32
Before Using the Terminal
An unlock screen appears when turning the
power on or the backlight on by pressing
p
.
■
Screen lock set to "Slide"
1
Touch and hold and drag
to until it laps over.
❖
Information
･
appears on the right until you tap or touch and
hold . Touch and hold and drag it left to
activate camera to shoot without unlocking the
screen lock.
･
The screen lock can be disabled. For details, see
"Canceling screen lock" (P.144).
When you turn on the terminal for the first
time, make initial settings such as a display
language, wireless network, online services,
docomo service, etc.
❖
Information
･
You can set or change the items later as required.
To change the settings later, from the Home screen,
tap , then tap [Settings] or [Setup guide] to set up
from the menu.
1
Press and hold
p
for over a
second.
･
A screen for selecting language
appears.
2
Tap [English (United
States)]
u
[Done].
･
"Welcome!" screen appears and you
can learn how to use the function and
make initial settings.
3
Tap .
･
The Internet connection screen
appears. Tap [Mobile network and Wi-
Fi] or [Wi-Fi only] to select.
4
Tap .
･
The wireless network screen appears.
Tap [Search for networks] to add Wi-Fi
network.
Unlocking the screen
Initial settings (Setup
guide)
33
Before Using the Terminal
5
Tap .
･
A service screen appears. Make settings
of "Google (P.134)", "Facebook (P.136)",
"Exchange ActiveSync (P.99)".
6
Tap .
･
Automatic renewal screen appears. Tap
[Synchronize automatically] or [No
thank you] to select.
7
Tap .
･
The import contacts screen appears.
For information on import contacts, see
"Exporting/Importing phonebook
entries" (P.93).
8
Tap .
･
Preferred applications screen appears.
Tap either [docomo applications] or
[Xperia
™
applications] to select.
9
Tap
u
[Finish].
･
Initial settings (Setup guide) end and an
initial setting screen for docomo service
appears.
10
Tap .
･
Application batch installation screen
appears. Tap [Install] or [Not install] to
select.
11
Tap .
･
Osaifu-Keitai screen appears. Tap [Set]
or [Not set] to select. If you select [Set],
the initial setting screen for Osaifu-
Keitai appears. Follow the onscreen
instructions.
12
Tap .
･
A setting screen for docomo apps
password appears. Tap [Set] and enter a
password.
13
Tap .
･
A setting screen for location provision
appears. Tap any of [Location providing
ON]/[Location providing OFF]/
[Unknown blocking] to select.
14
Tap .
･
Screen for Send preinstalled apps usage
status appears. Tap [Send] or [Not send]
to select.
15
Tap
u
[OK].
･
A home screen appears.
❖
Information
･
Make sure to check if the data connection is available
(LTE/3G/GPRS) before setup online services. For
checking the data connection status, see "Status
icon" (P.33).
34
Before Using the Terminal
A status bar appears at the top of the screen.
In the status bar, the terminal status and
notification are displayed. Notification icons
appear on the left side, and the terminal
status icons appear on the right side of the
status bar.
The main status icons displayed on the
screen are as follows.
The main notification icons displayed on the
screen are as follows.
Status bar
Status icon
Signal strength
During International roaming
No signal
HSDPA available
Communicating in HSDPA
3G (packet) available
Communication in 3G (packet)
LTE available
LTE in communication
Connecting to Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi in communication
Connecting to Wi-Fi using Auto IP function
Bluetooth function ON
Status bar
Connecting to Bluetooth device
Airplane mode activated
Silent mode (vibration) ON
Silent mode (mute) ON
Speakerphone ON
Microphone set to mute
Alarm is set
Battery status
The battery is charging
docomo mini UIM card is locked or not inserted
Notification icon
New email message
New Gmail message
New message (SMS)
Problem with message (SMS) delivery
New instant message
New Area Mail
New Facebook message
Uploading data to Facebook
Uploading data to Facebook completed
Facebook setting request notification
Receiving/Downloading data
Sending/Uploading data
Bluetooth connection request notification
Unmount microSD card to remove (reading/
writing unavailable)
35
Before Using the Terminal
Preparing microSD card/internal storage
Installation is completed (when installing
applications from Google Play, etc.)
Update notification (when update of the
installed market application is notified)
Software update notification or updating
software
Osaifu-Keitai lock is set
Making or receiving a call, during a call
Calling with Bluetooth device
Call on hold
Missed call
New voice mail
Upcoming calendar event
Stopwatch is running
Timer is set
Playing a track with Media Player
Playing a track with WALKMAN
1Seg activated
FM radio in use
USB connected
MHL connected
Available to activate TV launcher
Communicating via Infrared
Data communication invalid
Wi-Fi open network available
Connecting to a VPN
Media server executed or connection request
notification by Connected devices
Red: Error messages
Yellow: Warning messages
Problem with sync
Setup guide unchecked
Personal area notification
More (undisplayed) notifications
Setting Wi-Fi tethering
Setting USB tethering
Setting Wi-Fi tethering and USB tethering
Wi-Fi Direct connected
Setting Location-based Wi-Fi
Positioning with GPS
AUTO-GPS is set
Green Heart energy saving icon (remove the AC
adapter from the power outlet)
Set application activated using LiveWare
™
manager when connecting
Connecting headphones
Setting Omakase Lock
Available memory on the terminal is low
36
Before Using the Terminal
Notification icons are displayed in the
Notification panel. You can open
notifications, such as mails, reminders, or
event notifications directly from the
Notification panel.
1
Flick or drag the status bar
downwards.
･
Tap
x
to close the notification
panel.
❖
Information
･
When the screen lock is set to "Slide", flick or drag the
status bar downwards to check the Notification
panel without unlocking the screen.
･
Flick or drag the status bar downwards to enable/
disable silent mode or data communications.
1
On the Notification panel, tap
[Clear].
❖
Information
･
Flick left or right on the display on the notification
panel to delete from the list.
･
Some notifications cannot be cleared.
Notification panel
Opening/Closing the
Notification panel
Notication panel
/ / Enable/disable silent mode
(Vibrate/Mute).
/ Enable/disable Bluetooth function.
/ Enable/disable Wi-Fi function.
/ Enable/disable data
communication.
Display Settings menu (P.112).
Clearing contents on the
Notification panel
37
Before Using the Terminal
Notification LED provides information on the
terminal status, incoming/receiving, etc.
❖
Information
･
If the battery level is not sufficient to activate when
turning the power ON, press
p
to flash red.
* In this manual, each key icon operation is described
with
x
,
y
,
r
.
Notification LED
LED status
Status Indication
Red
The battery is charging when the
remaining battery level is 14% or
less.
Flashing red
The remaining battery level is 14%
or less.
Green
The battery is charging when the
remaining battery level is 90% or
more.
Flashing green
Received Gmail mails while
backlight is off exist.
Flashing blue
While backlight is off, missed calls/
incoming messages (SMS) are
notified.
Orange
The battery is charging when the
remaining battery level is 15% -
89%.
Basic operations
Basic key icon operation
x
Back
･
Go back to the previous screen.
Or close a dialog box, Option
menu, or the Notifications
panel.
･
Close the software keyboard.
y
Home
･
Go to the Home screen.
r
Recent
apps
･
Recently used applications
appear on a list. Tap a
thumbnail to activate or flick
left or right to delete from the
list. (P.75)
38
Before Using the Terminal
Precautions on using touch screen
･
Touch screen is designed for being touched
lightly with fingers. Do not push it forcibly
with a finger or press it with sharp objects
(nail, ballpoint pen, pin, etc.).
･
Touching the touch screen may not work in
the following cases. Note that it may cause
malfunction.
- Operation with gloved hands
- Operation with tip of fingernail
- Operation with foreign object on the screen
- Operation with protective sheet or seal on
the screen
Operations on the touch screen
■
Tap
Touch an item such as icon or menu with
your finger lightly and release it.
･
Double-tap means tapping twice quickly.
■
Touch and hold
Touch and hold an icon or menu item long.
■
Flick
Touch the screen and flick up/down/left/
right.
■
Drag
Touch the screen, drag to the desired
position and release the finger.
■
Scroll
Flick up/down/left/right displayed contents
to scroll (move) the display position.
■
Pinch
Touch the screen with two fingers and
widen (pinch-out) or narrow (pinch-in) the
fingers' distance. On some screens, pinch-
out to zoom in and pinch-in to zoom out.
Using the touch screen
39
Before Using the Terminal
You can set the screen orientation to switch
between landscape and portrait view
automatically according to the terminal
orientation.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Display].
2
Mark [Auto-rotate screen]
checkbox.
❖
Information
･
Even when you change the orientation of the
terminal, the screen may not change to landscape
view depending on the screen such as Home screen,
etc.
･
From the Home screen, tap , then tap
[Settings]
u
[Accessibility] and mark [Auto-rotate
screen] to switch the screen automatically between
landscape and portrait view.
You can save the current displayed screen as
an image (screen shot).
You can check captured screen shots on the
album (P.195).
1
On the screen you want to capture,
press and hold
p
and lower of
m
for over a second at the
same time.
･
Screenshot is captured and appears
in the status bar.
On the phonebook list screen, tap [Index] at
the bottom of the screen to display index
characters with which you can search by
Japanese syllabary and alphabetic order.
･
Tap the index character to move on the list.
Switching portrait/landscape
view automatically
Capturing the screenshot
Selecting items quickly from a
list
40
Before Using the Terminal
You can switch on/off of the option settings
by marking or unmarking the checkboxes or
radio buttons.
･
To switch on/off of the option setting, tap the
checkbox or radio button.
■
Checkbox
■
Radio button
Enter a word in the search box to browse the
information in the terminal or on the
Internet.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Search].
･
When you use for the first time, the
Terms of Service window for Google
Search appears. Read the terms of use
and tap [OK].
･
The software keyboard appears.
2
Enter a search word.
･
Search suggestions appear as you enter
a character.
･
For character entry, see "Character
entry" (P.40).
･
To enter a new search word, tap .
3
Tap a search item or .
❖
Information
･
Tap on the software keyboard to input a search
word by voice.
Marking or unmarking option
checkbox
Mark
Unmark
Mark
Unmark
Searching information in
the terminal and web
pages
41
Before Using the Terminal
You can set search engines to use for Quick
search box or set search objectives in the
terminal.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Search].
2
Tap , then tap [Settings].
･
Google search setting screen appears.
You can set the following items.
To enter characters, use the software
keyboard which appears when you tap the
character input box in a mail, phonebook,
etc.
❖
Information
･
When the software keyboard is displayed,
appears on the status bar.
･
To return to the previous screen from the character
entry screen, tap
x
.
･
Touch and hold a text in the character entry screen
to display the enlarged text to check with dragging
on the text.
In the terminal, you can select Input method
(keyboard type) from "Shabette-Key-
Nyuryoku", "Xperia
™
Chinese keyboard",
"Xperia
™
Japanese keyboard" or "Xperia
™
keyboard".
Search settings
Searchable
items
Change the search range by
marking/unmarking data categories
(Google, Apps, Browser, Email,
Google Play Movies, Messaging,
OfficeSuite, Phonebook, Play Store,
WALKMAN) in the terminal.
Google Search
Set whether to display search
options from Web history when a
search word is entered, or whether
to activate/delete Web history.
･
You need to create your Google
account.
Character entry
Selecting input method
Shabette-Key-
Nyuryoku
Select to enter characters by
voice.
Xperia
™
Chinese
keyboard
Select to enter Chinese.
Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard
Select to enter Japanese.
Xperia
™
keyboard
Select a language for text entry.
Select to enter language other
than Japanese.
42
Before Using the Terminal
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap [Language &
input]
u
[Default]
u
[Shabette-Key-
Nyuryoku]/[Xperia
™
Chinese
keyboard]/[Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard]/[Xperia
™
keyboard].
❖
Information
･
On a character entry screen, drag the status bar
downwards and tap [Select input method] to select
from Google voice typing/Shabette-Key-Nyuryoku/
Xperia
™
Chinese keyboard/Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard/Xperia
™
keyboard.
For Japanese keyboard, there are 4 types of
software keyboards: phonepad, QWERTY,
Japanese syllabary and Kana handwriting
input.
❖
Information
･
The key display of software keyboard varies
depending on the entry screen, character mode or
settings.
■
Phonepad keyboard
Japanese characters can be entered in
"Kana input" mode.
■
QWERTY keyboard
Japanese characters can be entered in
"Romaji input" mode.
Software keyboard
Portrait
Landscape
Landscape
Portrait
43
Before Using the Terminal
■
Japanese syllabary keyboard
You can use the software keys arranged
according to the Japanese syllabary to enter
Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.
■
Kana handwriting input
Japanese characters can be entered in
"Handwriting input" mode.
1
On a character entry screen, touch
and hold .
2
Tap / / / / / /
/ .
･
: The phonepad keyboard appears.
･
: The QWERTY keyboard appears.
･
: The Japanese syllabary keyboard
appears.
･
: The Kana handwriting input
appears.
･
Tap to display Japanese keyboard
settings screen and you can check/
change the settings.
･
Tap to display the plug-in
application list.
･
: Switch one-byte/two-byte
character.
･
: Hide the software keyboard.
❖
Information
･
By default, the phonepad keyboard for portrait
screen is set and QWERTY keyboard for landscape
screen is set. Also, "Auto capitalization", "Word
suggestions" and "Spell check" are set to on.
Portrait
Landscape
Portrait
Landscape
Switching the keyboard
44
Before Using the Terminal
You can use the software keys arranged
according to the Japanese syllabary to enter
Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.
The main functions of the touch-keys
･
To change character modes and other
entering operations, tap the following icons
on the phonepad keyboard.
Entering characters on the
phonepad keyboard
Icon Function
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji"
→
"Alphanumeric" in order and a status
icon,
→
/ / appears in the
status bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a pop-up window.
/ / / : Keyboard switch
: Display the setting screen for
Japanese keyboard
: Display the plug-in application list
(two-byte)/ (one-byte) : Switch
character mode
: Hide the software keyboard
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"
→
"Number" in order and a status icon, /
, etc.
→
/ appears in the status
bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list
to enter them. Switch tabs to display
smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram
tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed
when entering in sp-mode mail.)
Appears before fixing character in
Hiragana/Kanji input mode. It displays
alphanumeric or katakana conversion
candidates assigned to tapped key.
Appears after conversion is fixed to
return to text before conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the left.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the right.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
When there is an unfixed character string
with the cursor at the right end, tap to
enter the same character as the one at
the end.
*2
Fix entered or converted characters.
When characters are already fixed, enter
a line feed at the cursor position.
Delete the character before the cursor.
Touch and hold to delete continuously.
When any character is entered or after
entered character is fixed, a space can be
entered. Touch and hold to input spaces
continuously.
Enter characters by voice. A candidate
list appears. Tap the character string you
want to enter.
Icon Function
45
Before Using the Terminal
*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the
desired position on the entered character string to
move the cursor.
*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "
確定
(Fix)" is
displayed. In some screens such as the mail account
registration screen, "
次へ
(Next)", "
完了
(Done)", "
実行
(Go)", etc. appear.
Settings of key entry
■
Flick input
Flick up/down/left/right to enter characters
in each column of kana syllabary.
･
Ex: Entering characters in "
な
" column
You can enter "
な
" only by tapping. Flick
left for "
に
", up for "
ぬ
", right for "
ね
" and
down for "
の
".
･
To switch upper/lower case or change to
voiced sound, flick or tap .
･
Flick input is available by default. You can
cancel by the following operation
beforehand.
a
From the Home screen, tap , then
tap [Settings].
b
Tap [Language & input] and on
"Xperia
™
Japanese keyboard".
Display the previous character (opposite
order).
In Hiragana/Kanji input mode, highlight
and select word in conversion
candidates. Tap continuously to change
a word highlighted in conversion
candidates and select a word to enter.
Touch and
hold
Activate online dictionary.
You need to mark "Online dictionary"
checkbox in the Japanese keyboard
setting screen.
/ Appears when entering numbers, tap to
switch one-byte/two-byte character.
Icon Function
ぬ
ねに
の
な
Flick left
Flick up Tap
Flick right
Flick down
46
Before Using the Terminal
c
[On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
Unmark [Flick input]
checkbox.
･
To change sensitivity of the flick input, on
the Xperia
™
Japanese keyboard setting
screen, tap [On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
[Sensitivity of flick input], then
select "High"/"Medium (default)"/"Low".
■
Toggle entry
Tap the same key continuously to enter the
assigned character.
To enter characters assigned to the same
key continuously, operate the followings.
･
Ex: To enter "
あお
"
a
Tap "
あ
" once.
b
Tap , and tap "
あ
" 5 times.
･
Ex: To enter "ca"
a
Tap "abc" 3 times.
b
Tap
*
.
c
Tap "abc" once.
* In some applications, tap in Step
b
.
❖
Information
･
When a certain time is passed after the key tapped,
the tapped key's highlighter goes off and you can
enter a character assigned to the same key
consecutively without tapping .
･
To switch upper/lower case or change to
voiced/semi-voiced sound, tap .
･
Multitap text input is available by default.
You can cancel by the following
operation beforehand.
a
From the Home screen, tap , then
tap [Settings].
b
Tap [Language & input], then tap
on "Xperia
™
Japanese keyboard".
c
[On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
Unmark [Multitap text
input] checkbox.
47
Before Using the Terminal
Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Japanese
characters in "Romaji input" mode.
The main functions of the touch-keys
･
To change character modes and other input
operations, tap the following icons on the
QWERTY keyboard.
Entering characters on the
QWERTY keyboard
Icon Function
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji"
→
"Alphanumeric" in order and a status
icon,
→
/ / / / /
appears in the status bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a pop-up window.
/ / / : Keyboard switch
: Display the setting screen for
Japanese keyboard
: Display the plug-in application list
(two-byte)/ (one-byte) : Switch
character mode
: Hide the software keyboard
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"
→
"Number/symbol" in order and a status
icon, / , etc.
→
/ appears in
the status bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list
to enter them. Switch tabs to display
smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram
tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed
when entering in sp-mode mail.)
Move the cursor
*1
: To the left.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the right.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
When there is an unfixed character string
with the cursor at the right end, tap to
enter the same character as the one at
the end.
*2
Fix entered or converted characters.
When characters are already fixed, enter
a line feed at the cursor position.
Delete the character before the cursor.
Touch and hold to delete continuously.
When any character is entered or after
entered character is fixed, a space can be
entered. Touch and hold to input spaces
continuously.
Enter characters by voice. A candidate
list appears. Tap the character string you
want to enter.
Appears before fixing character in
Hiragana/Kanji input mode. It displays
alphabet or katakana conversion
candidates assigned to tapped key.
Icon Function
48
Before Using the Terminal
*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the
desired position on the entered character string to
move the cursor.
*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "
確定
(Fix)" is
displayed. In some screens such as the mail account
registration screen, "
次へ
(Next)", "
完了
(Done)", "
実行
(Go)", etc. appear.
Selecting an assistant keyboard
When you enter in Hiragana/Kanji input
mode using the QWERTY keyboard, you can
change the assistant keyboard to make the
frequent using keys to be displayed widely
for easy tapping.
1
On a character entry screen, touch
and hold .
2
Tap .
3
Tap [On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
[Choose key type].
4
Tap any of [Static key resizing]/
[Key highlight while typing]/
[Dynamic key resizing with
highlight]/[Off].
■
Static key resizing
Widen frequent using key for easy tapping.
/ /
In alphanumerics input mode, tap to
switch capitalization/upper case/lower
case.
In Hiragana/Kanji input mode, highlight
and select word in conversion
candidates. Tap continuously to change
a word highlighted in conversion
candidates and select a word to enter.
Touch and
hold
Activate online dictionary.
You need to mark "Online dictionary"
checkbox in the Japanese keyboard
setting screen.
/ Appears in number input mode, tap to
switch alphanumerics to one-byte/two-
byte character.
Icon Function
49
Before Using the Terminal
■
Key highlight while typing
Widen frequent using key and highlight the
key that is predicted for the next entry.
■
Dynamic key resizing with highlight
Widen the key that is predicted for the next
entry much further and highlight it.
■
Off
Display equally the width of each key.
Changing display keys
･
For Japanese input, you can set not to display
less-frequent-used keys (Q, X, C, etc.) on the
QWERTY keyboard.
1
On a character entry screen, touch
and hold .
2
Tap .
3
Tap [On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
[Hide keys].
･
When the Choose key type (P.47) is set
to "Off", [Hide keys] cannot be selected.
4
Unmark the checkbox of the key
you want to hide.
5
Tap [OK].
50
Before Using the Terminal
Customizing keyboard
･
You can change symbols which are displayed
in QWERTY keyboard when entering number
to desired characters/symbols.
1
On a character entry screen, touch
and hold .
2
Tap .
3
Tap [On-screen keyboard
settings]
u
[Keyboard
customization].
4
Tap a symbol you want to change
and delete character previously
set, then enter a character to
display and tap [OK].
･
Only one character (two-byte or one-
byte character) can be entered.
5
Tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
To return to the default status, in Step 3, tap , then
tap [Reset]
u
[OK].
You can use the software keys arranged
according to the Japanese syllabary to enter
Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.
The main functions of the touch-keys
･
To change character modes and other input
operations, tap the following icons on the
Japanese syllabary keyboard.
Entering characters on the
Japanese syllabary keyboard
Icon Function
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji"
→
"Alphanumeric" in order and a status
icon,
→
/ / / / /
appears in the status bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a pop-up window.
/ / / : Keyboard switch
: Display the setting screen for
Japanese keyboard
: Display the plug-in application list
(two-byte)/ (one-byte) : Switch
character mode
: Hide the software keyboard
Appears in Hiragana/Kanji input mode.
Switch upper/lower case or add voiced
sound/semi-voiced sound.
51
Before Using the Terminal
*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the
desired position on the entered character string to
move the cursor.
*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "
確定
(Fix)" is
displayed. In some screens such as the mail account
registration screen, "
次へ
(Next)", "
完了
(Done)", "
実行
(Go)", etc. appear.
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"
→
"Number" in order and a status icon, /
, etc.
→
/ appears in the status
bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list
to enter them. Switch tabs to display
smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram
tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed
when entering in sp-mode mail.)
Move the cursor
*1
: To the left.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the right.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
When there is an unfixed character string
with the cursor at the right end, tap to
enter the same character as the one at
the end.
*2
Fix entered or converted characters.
When characters are already fixed, enter
a line feed at the cursor position.
Delete the character before the cursor.
Touch and hold to delete continuously.
When any character is entered or after
entered character is fixed, a space can be
entered. Touch and hold to input spaces
continuously.
Enter characters by voice. A candidate
list appears. Tap the character string you
want to enter.
Icon Function
/
/
In alphanumerics input mode, tap to
switch capitalization/upper case/lower
case or switch allocated symbols.
Appears in landscape view and you can
display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list
to enter them. Switch tabs to display
smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram
tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed
when entering in sp-mode mail.)
In Hiragana/Kanji input mode, highlight
and select word in conversion
candidates. Tap continuously to change
a word highlighted in conversion
candidates and select a word to enter.
Touch and
hold
Activate online dictionary.
You need to mark "Online dictionary"
checkbox in the Japanese keyboard
setting screen.
Icon Function
52
Before Using the Terminal
You can use the Kana handwriting input
screen to enter Japanese by "Handwriting
input".
The main functions of the touch-keys
･
To change character modes and other input
operations, tap the following icons on the
Kana handwriting input.
Entering characters on the
Kana handwriting input
Icon Function
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji"
→
"Alphanumeric" in order and a status
icon,
→
/ / appears in the
status bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a pop-up window.
/ / / : Keyboard switch
: Display the setting screen for
Japanese keyboard
: Display the plug-in application list
(two-byte)/ (one-byte) : Switch
character mode
: Hide the software keyboard
Appears in Hiragana/Kanji input mode.
Switch upper/lower case or add voiced
sound/semi-voiced sound.
Appears in alphanumerics input mode,
tap to switch upper case and lower case.
/
Each time you tap, the character mode
switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"
→
"Number" in order and a status icon, /
, etc.
→
/ appears in the status
bar.
/
Touch and
hold
Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list
to enter them. Switch tabs to display
smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram
tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed
when entering in sp-mode mail.)
Appears before fixing character in
Hiragana/Kanji input mode. It displays
alphanumeric or katakana conversion
candidates assigned to tapped key.
Appears after conversion is fixed to
return to text before conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the left.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
Move the cursor
*1
: To the right.
Touch and hold to move continuously.
Or change the range for conversion.
When there is an unfixed character string
with the cursor at the right end, tap to
enter the same character as the one at
the end.
*2
Fix entered or converted characters.
When characters are already fixed, enter
a line feed at the cursor position.
Delete the character before the cursor.
Touch and hold to delete continuously.
Icon Function
53
Before Using the Terminal
*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the
desired position on the entered character string to
move the cursor.
*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "
確定
(Fix)" is
displayed. In some screens such as the mail account
registration screen, "
次へ
(Next)", "
完了
(Done)", "
実行
(Go)", etc. appear.
❖
Information
･
When you enter character by Kana handwriting for
the first time, read a guidance and tap [OK].
･
In Kana handwriting input, hiragana, alphabet,
number, some symbols can be entered.
･
You can enter a character continuously without
deleting entered character.
･
For voiced sound and semi voiced sound mark, enter
in the right upper part of the Kana handwriting input
screen.
･
For punctuation mark and lower case, enter in the
lower part from the center of the Kana handwriting
input.
･
For entering alphabet, enter it with reference to
lower horizontal line of the Kana handwriting input
screen.
In the character entry screen such as mail,
phonebook, etc., double-tap text you want to
edit so that text edit menu appears at the top
of the screen. Drag or to change the
character string to select.
When any character is entered or after
entered character is fixed, a space can be
entered. Touch and hold to input spaces
continuously.
Enter characters by voice. A candidate
list appears. Tap the character string you
want to enter.
In Hiragana/Kanji input mode, highlight
and select word in conversion
candidates. Tap continuously to change
a word highlighted in conversion
candidates and select a word to enter.
Touch and
hold
Activate online dictionary.
You need to mark "Online dictionary"
checkbox in the Japanese keyboard
setting screen.
Appears when entering number. Display
a one-byte/two-byte symbol list to enter
them. Switch tabs to display smiley list to
enter them. (a pictogram tab and deco-
mail tab are also displayed when
entering in sp-mode mail.)
Icon Function
Editing text
(Select all)
Select all entered text.
(Cut)
Cut a selected character string.
(Copy)
Copy a selected character string.
(Paste)
Paste a copied/cut character
string.
Close the edit menu.
54
Before Using the Terminal
❖
Information
･
To paste a copied or cut character string, touch and
hold a position where you want to insert, then tap
[PASTE]. Alternatively, when texts are entered, tap a
position where you want to insert, then tap and
[PASTE].
･
Edit menu icons vary by applications.
For each input method, you can make
settings related to character entry.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Google voice typing"/
"Shabette-Key-Nyuryoku"/
"Xperia
™
Chinese keyboard"/
"Xperia
™
Japanese keyboard"/
"Xperia
™
keyboard".
･
Settings screen for respective input
method appears. Tap an item displayed
on the screen to set.
❖
Information
･
The items vary depending on the input method.
Common settings of software
keyboard
Make keyboard settings such as Key sound,
Vibrate, etc.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
･
The setting screen for Japanese
keyboard appears.
3
Tap [On-screen keyboard settings].
･
Set items for "COMMON ON-SCREEN
KEYBOARD SETTINGS".
Setting character entry
Setting Japanese keyboard
Sound on
keypress
Set whether to sound at the time of
key tapping.
Vibration on
keypress
Set whether to vibrate at the time of
key tapping.
Pop-up on
keypress
Set to popup the key you have
tapped at the time of key tapping.
No. of lines
(portrait)
Set number of lines for conversion
candidates displayed in portrait
mode.
No. of lines
(landscape)
Set number of lines for conversion
candidates displayed in landscape
mode.
55
Before Using the Terminal
❖
Information
･
By default, conversion candidates are displayed in 2
lines in portrait/landscape screen.
Auto capitalization
Set to capitalize automatically the top letter
you enter in one-byte alphabet entry mode.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Mark [Auto capitalization].
❖
Information
･
The top letter may not always be capitalized
automatically in one-byte alphabet entry mode
when [Auto capitalization] is marked.
Keeping keyboard type
Set to stabilize the last status of keyboard
(phonepad/QWERTY/Japanese syllabary
keyboard/Kana handwriting input) in the
each portrait/landscape screen in kana/
alphabet/number input mode.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on [Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard].
3
[On-screen keyboard settings]
u
Mark [Keep keyboard type].
❖
Information
･
You can set to stabilize the last status of keyboard in
the each portrait/landscape screen without marking
[Keep keyboard type].
You can change keyboard skin.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [Keyboard skin].
4
Select from displayed keyboards
and tap [Set skin].
❖
Information
･
To download and add keyboard skins from a website,
tap [Search for skin] in Step 4. Some keyboard skins
downloaded from website may not support the
terminal.
･
To delete the downloaded keyboard skin, from the
Home screen, tap , and tap [Settings]
u
[Apps],
and tap the keyboard skin you want to delete in the
"Downloaded" tab, and then tap
[Uninstall]
u
[OK]
u
[OK]. Also, tap [Uninstall] in Step 4
so that you can delete the keyboard skin that is not
compatible with the terminal.
Keyboard skin settings
56
Before Using the Terminal
The Word suggestion function shows
predicted conversion candidates when you
enter Japanese/English characters. Mark the
checkbox of Word suggestion checkbox to
set options "Spell check" and "Auto space".
These options help you entering characters
with ease.
Setting Word suggestion
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Mark [Word suggestions]
checkbox.
❖
Information
･
Flick or drag downward in the word suggestion field
to enlarge suggestion field in which you can see
more word suggestions and to hide the keyboard.
Tap [
前候補
(previous suggestion)]/[
次候補
(next
suggestion)]/[
確定
(fix)] shown at the bottom of the
word suggestions screen to select/fix characters to
be entered. To show the software keyboard, tap [
戻る
(Back)] or
x
.
Setting Spell check
･
Spell check corrects mistyped characters and
shows conversion candidates before
conversion in one-byte alphabet input mode
when entering characters with QWERTY
keyboard.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Mark [Spell check] checkbox.
Setting Auto space
･
When selecting English word suggestion,
Auto space enters next to the entered
character. However, space is not entered
automatically in the mail address or URL input
fields.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Mark [Auto space] checkbox.
Word suggestion settings
57
Before Using the Terminal
To display the word as the preferred
candidate when entering characters, set the
user dictionary beforehand.
Registering words in user dictionaries
There are 2 types of user dictionaries: "My
words Japanese" and "My words English".
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [My words Japanese]/[My
words English].
4
Tap and [Add].
5
Tap the character input box for
"Reading" and fill it out.
6
Enter a word in the input box for
"Word" and tap [
完了
(Done)].
7
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
Up to 50 characters (regardless of one-byte or two-
byte characters) can be stored for a "Reading" and
"Word", and up to 500 items can be stored in the user
dictionary.
･
When entering characters, tapping [
直変
(Direct
conversion)] in the word suggestion field may give
priority to some registered words.
Editing user dictionary
1
On the user dictionary screen,
select a word you want to edit.
2
Tap and [Edit].
3
Edit the content and tap [Save].
Deleting words from user dictionary
1
On the user dictionary screen,
select a word you want to delete.
2
Tap and tap [Delete]
u
[OK].
･
To delete all words in the list, tap
[Delete all]
u
[OK].
Setting Words by learning
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [Learn words].
4
Mark [Save word while typing].
･
To reset already learned words, tap
[Delete saved words]
u
[OK].
User dictionary settings
58
Before Using the Terminal
❖
Information
･
To delete history for learned words individually,
touch and hold a word you want to delete and tap
[Delete].
Setting online dictionary
In Hiragana/Kanji input mode, touch and
hold to activate online dictionary.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [Online dictionary].
4
Tap [Online dictionary], then read
the note and tap [Agree].
･
[Online dictionary] is marked.
Backing up and restoring dictionary
User dictionary and Words by learning can be
backed up onto an internal storage and
restored when needed.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [Backup & restore].
4
Tap [Backup]/[Restore].
5
Mark a dictionary you want to
back up or restore from among
[My words Japanese], [My words
English], or [Learn words].
6
Tap [Go].
･
When backing up, a screen asking
whether to overwrite the user
dictionary on the internal storage
appears. When restoring, a screen
asking whether to overwrite the user
dictionary in the terminal appears.
7
Tap [OK]
u
[OK].
･
The data is backed up or restored.
❖
Information
･
If restoring data is failed, user dictionary in the
terminal restores to the default. Restore by operating
again.
･
User dictionary and Words by learning are not
backed up onto microSD card.
59
Before Using the Terminal
When entering characters, touch and hold
and tap to display the plug-in
application list.
Using Contact Picker 2.3
If contacts are registered to the Contacts, you
can use "Contact Picker 2.3" to enter contact
information when entering characters.
"Contact Picker 2.3" is a preinstalled plug-in
application.
1
On a character entry screen, touch
and hold .
2
Tap .
3
Tap [Contact Picker 2.3].
4
On the contacts list screen, tap the
contact to pick up.
5
Mark items you want to enter and
tap [OK].
･
If you want to select/deselect all items,
tap [Mark all]/[Unmark all].
Adding a plug-in application
You can install and add plug-in applications
to use when entering characters.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [Manage extensions].
4
On the Info screen, tap [OK].
･
Plug-in setting screen appears.
5
Tap [Download new extensions].
6
Tap an application and follow the
onscreen instructions.
❖
Information
･
Marked plug-in applications in the plug-in setting
screen can be activated in the character entry screen.
Checkboxes for preinstalled plug-in applications,
"Contact Picker 2.3" is marked by default.
Using a plug-in application
60
Before Using the Terminal
You can view the detailed explanations on
the high performance Japanese keyboard
from the basic to application. The latest
information can be obtained from the
websites for plug-in applications or keyboard
skins.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings]
u
[Language &
input].
2
Tap on "Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard".
3
Tap [POBox Touch User Guide].
Connect USB keyboard or Bluetooth
keyboard that supports HID (Human
Interface Device) profile with the terminal to
enter characters.
❖
Information
･
Some Bluetooth keyboards compatible with HID
profiles cannot be used or may not operate properly.
･
Use USB keyboard or Bluetooth keyboard with key
order that is compatible with 106 keyboard/109
keyboard.
･
Tap the character input box to display or on
the status bar of the terminal, then enter characters
with USB keyboard or Bluetooth keyboard.
･
Press "
半角
/
全角
(one-byte/two-byte)" key on USB
keyboard or Bluetooth keyboard to switch Kana
input/Alphabet input on the terminal.
･
While displaying word suggestions, press "Tab" key/
"
↓
" key on the USB keyboard or the Bluetooth
keyboard to select a word in word suggestions.
･
While not selecting a word in word suggestions,
press "Space" key on the USB keyboard or the
Bluetooth keyboard to switch to direct conversion.
･
You can edit texts with connected USB keyboard or
the Bluetooth keyboard. For instructions on editing
texts on the terminal, see "Editing text" (P.52).
- Press "Ctrl" key and "A" key to select all entered text.
- Press "Ctrl" key and "X" key to cut a selected
character string.
- Press "Ctrl" key and "C" key to copy a selected
character string.
- Press "Ctrl" key and "V" key to paste a copied or cut
character string.
POBox Touch User Guide
USB keyboard/Bluetooth
keyboard
61
docomo Palette UI
docomo Palette UI
Home screen is a start screen for using
applications. You can personalize the Home
screen by adding or moving, for example,
application shortcuts and widgets, or
changing the wallpaper.
Tapping
y
displays Home screen which
consists of up to 12 screens you can use
flicking left and right.
a
Current home screen position
b
Widget : Google Search
c
Widget : i-channel
d
Widget : Machi-chara
e
Shortcuts (applications)
f
Applications button
g
Wallpaper
❖
Information
･
You can switch the home application between
"docomo" and "Xperia
™
" in the terminal.
"docomo" is set to the home application by default.
To switch the home application, from the Home
screen, tap and [Setup guide] and on the
Preferred applications screen, [Change now]
u
[Home
screen], or from the Home screen, tap ,
[Settings]
u
[Xperia
™
]
u
[Preferred apps
settings]
u
[Home screen]. To switch applications
(Home, phonebook (contacts), video or music player)
to be used in the terminal all at once, from the Home
screen, tap [Preferred apps settings]
u
[OK], or from
the Home screen, tap ,
[Settings]
u
[Xperia
™
]
u
[Preferred apps
settings]
u
[Set all to].
･
When the home application is switched, widgets or
shortcuts on the screen may not be displayed
correctly depending on home screen layout etc.
Switching the Home screen
1
Flick the Home screen to left or
right.
･
The Home screen switches.
❖
Information
･
You can check the current position of the Home
screen with at the top of the screen.
･
Alternatively, display a list of home screens and then
tap a home screen to switch. For details on the home
screen list, see "Displaying a list of home screens"
(P.61).
Home screen
Learning Home screen
a
b
e
fe
g
c
d
"ひつじのしつじくん®
(Butler Sheep)"
©NTT DOCOMO
62
docomo Palette UI
Displaying a list of home screens
1
From the Home screen, pinch-in.
･
A home screen list appears.
❖
Information
･
Touch an hold an area of the Home screen where no
icons are displayed and tap [Home screens] to
display list of home screens.
･
To return to the home screen, pinch-out, or tap
y
or
x
.
1
Touch and hold an area of the
Home screen where no icons are
displayed.
･
"select an action" menu appears to
change the Home screen.
■
Select an action
Adding a shortcut to the Home screen
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Shortcut].
2
Select a shortcut you want to add.
･
The shortcut appears on the Home
screen.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, you can add from the Home screen,
and touch and hold an icon you want to add, tap
[Add].
Adding to the Home screen
Shortcut
Add shortcuts of applications or
setting screens. (P.61)
Widget
Add widgets. (P.62)
Folder
Create new folder etc. (P.63)
Kisekae
Change the background of the
home screen or application screen,
or download from website to add.
(P.63)
Wallpaper
Change the wallpaper or download
from website to add. (P.63)
Group
Add group shortcut of application
screen. (P.64)
Home screens
Show home screens. (P.61)
Wallpaper loop
settings
Set whether to loop wallpaper on
the Home screen.
63
docomo Palette UI
Adding a widget to the Home screen
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Widget].
･
A list of widgets appears.
Bookmarks
View bookmarks.
Calendar
Display the calendar.
Contact
View contacts using Contacts
application of Xperia
™
.
Contents
Headline
Display latest information of
contents such as music, videos, e-
books, etc.
docomo
location
information
Activate docomo location
information application.
docomo Wi-Fi
かんたん接続
(docomo Wi-Fi
easy
connection)
View docomo Wi-Fi.
Facebook
View Friends' comments.
Friends' music
View list of songs shared in
Facebook.
Gmail
View Inbox of Gmail etc.
Google Search
Display the Quick search box.
Google+ posts
View posted contents in Google+.
IC Tag/Barcode
Reader
Enable or disable IC Tag read mode.
Infrared
Display "Send My profile" button
and "Receive file" button for infrared
communication.
ｉチャネルウィ
ジェット
(i-
channel
widget)
Display latest information such as
news or weather.
Latitude
View locations of members.
Machi-chara
Display reception of mails or calls
information with Machi-chara.
Music
Unlimited
View Music Unlimited.
Personal area
Display personal area.
Phonebook
View phonebook using phonebook
application provided by DOCOMO.
Phonebook
Select
members
Display history of calls or message
(SMS) of 3 contacts selected from
the Phonebook fixed/at random.
Play Store
Show applications recommended
by Google Play.
Schedule &
Memo
Display memos or photo memos on
the calendar.
Traffic
Enter a widget name and
destination to activate the widget
showing travel time to the
destination. Tap to check supplied
traffic information.
YouTube
Display the list of frequently played
movies and recommended.
スマホなるほど
ツアーズ
(Tips
of smartphone
for docomo
with series)
View "Tips of smartphone for
docomo with series".
64
docomo Palette UI
2
Select an item.
❖
Information
･
If you install an application with widget from Google
Play, the installed widget is added to the widget list.
Adding a folder to the Home screen
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Folder].
2
Select a folder you want to add.
･
The folder appears on the Home
screen.
･
You can rename or add items to a folder
by selecting [New folder] on the folder
selection screen.
■
Renaming
Touch and hold a folder you want to
rename
u
[Edit name]
u
Enter a folder
name and tap [OK].
■
Adding an item
From the Home screen, touch and hold a
shortcut you want to add
u
Drag it onto
any folder.
･
A shortcut is moved into a folder.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, open a folder by tapping and then
touch and hold the title bar to display the [Folder
name] entry box to rename.
Changing Kisekae
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Kisekae].
2
Flick left or right and tap a Kisekae
you want to change to.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, select Kisekae you want to change to
and tap [Set] to change Kisekae.
･
Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap and
then tap [Kisekae] to change.
･
You can add Kisekae contents by tapping [Search] to
download from website. To delete added Kisekae
contents, select the image and tap
[Delete]
u
[Delete].
Changing wallpaper
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Wallpaper].
2
Tap [Album]/[Live Wallpapers]/
[Wallpaper gallery]/[Xperia
™
wallpapers].
･
When you tap [Xperia
™
wallpapers],
select an image to set to the wallpaper,
tap [Set wallpaper].
プリインアプリ
利用状況
(Usage
of preinstalled
applications)
View use of preinstalled
applications.
診断ツール
(Diagnosis tool)
Activate diagnosis tool.
65
docomo Palette UI
･
When you tap [Album], select an image
to set to the wallpaper, drag and set
trimming frame for range in the image
you want to use as wallpaper, and then
tap [Crop] to set wallpaper.
･
When you tap [Live Wallpapers], select
a content, tap [Set wallpaper]. You can
also download and add Live wallpaper
content from a web page. For some
contents, you can change type or
contents displayed on the wallpaper by
tapping [Settings].
･
When you tap [Wallpaper gallery],
select an image you want to use as
wallpaper, then tap [Set wallpaper].
Adding a group to the Home screen
1
On "select an action" menu screen
(P.61), tap [Group].
2
Select a group of applications you
want to add.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, on the Application screen (P.66), touch
and hold a group name and then tap [Add].
You can add, delete, sort home screens while
the home screen list is displayed.
･
For details on the home screen list, see
"Displaying a list of home screens" (P.61).
Adding a home screen
1
From the Home screen, pinch-in.
2
Tap .
❖
Information
･
There are 5 home screens by default. You can add 7
home screens moreover.
Deleting a home screen
1
From the Home screen, pinch-in.
2
Tap of thumbnail you want to
delete on the Home screen.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, on the home screen list, touch and hold
a thumbnail of home screen you want to delete and
tap [Delete].
Changing the Home screen
66
docomo Palette UI
Sorting home screens
1
From the Home screen, pinch-in.
2
Touch and hold a home screen you
want to sort.
3
Drag it to the place you want to
move.
Moving an icon on the Home screen
1
From the Home screen, touch an
icon you want to move.
2
Drag it anywhere.
･
To move to another Home screen, keep
touching the icon and drag it to left or
right.
Deleting an icon from the Home
screen
1
From the Home screen, touch and
hold an icon you want to delete.
2
Tap [Delete].
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, touch and hold an icon you want to
delete from the Home screen and drag it to
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Uninstalling a shortcut or widget on
the Home screen
･
Before uninstalling shortcut or widget on the
Home screen, back up contents related to the
application or widget that you want to save
including data saved in the application or
widget.
･
Some applications or widgets may not be
uninstalled.
1
From the Home screen, touch and
hold a shortcut or widget you want
to uninstall.
2
Tap [Uninstall].
･
Uninstall screen appears.
3
Tap [OK]
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
You can also uninstall them from the Settings menu.
For details, see "Deleting installed application" (P.132).
67
docomo Palette UI
You can access the applications installed in
the terminal using the Application screen.
1
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications button).
･
The Application screen appears.
a
Application tab
･
View Application screen.
b
Recommends tab
･
Install applications recommended by DOCOMO.
c
Optional menu icon
･
View optional menu such as Settings.
d
Group name
･
To display/hide applications in the group, tap the
group name.
e
Application icon
･
is displayed for newly arrived application.
･
Some application icons are displayed with a
number of missed calls or unread mails.
f
Applications in the group
･
To display/hide all applications in the group,
pinch-out/in the Application screen.
g
Number of applications in the group
❖
Information
･
To close the Application screen, tap
x
or
y
.
･
If you download applications from website, icons
with are added to the Application screen.
･
If you selected Japanese as a language in Initial
settings (P.31), some group names are displayed in
Japanese even after the language setting is changed.
These group names can be changed to English (P.74).
Application screen
Learning Application screen
dg
f
e
abc
68
docomo Palette UI
The applications displayed on the Application screen by default are as follows.
･
For usage of some applications, separate subscription (Charged) is required.
■
DOCOMO Services
■
Basic Functions
Applications
Icon Applications Description Page
dmenu A shortcut application for "dmenu" to find contents that you used
in i-mode and joyful and convenient contents for smartphones
readily.
P. 1 6 1
dmarket Activate dmarket. You can buy contents such as music, videos,
books at the dmarket. Applications on Google Play are also
featured.
P. 1 6 1
i
チャネル
(i-channel) An application for using i-channel.
−
ｉコンシェル
(i-
concier)
An application for using i-concier. i-concier is a service in which a
mobile phone supports your life like a "butler" or "concierge".
−
しゃべってコンシェル
(Shabette concier)
Speak "what you want to search" or "what you want to do" to the
terminal. It understands your intention and display the best
solution on the display from the services or functions of the
terminal (in Japanese only).
−
Machi-chara An application for displaying character on the terminal screen. The
character moves on the widget and informs you i-concier
information, mail reception, incoming calls, etc.
−
ドコモバックアップ
(docomo backup)
An application for using "
ケータイデータお預かりサービス
(Data
Security Service)" or "
電話帳バックアップ
(Phonebook backup)".
Back up or restore phonebook data etc.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
Phone Activate DOCOMO phone application to make/receive calls, and
switch between calls.
P. 7 7
Dial Activate Xperia
™
phone application to make/receive calls, and
switch between calls.
−
69
docomo Palette UI
■
Entertainment
Phonebook Activate DOCOMO phonebook application to manage phonebooks
of your friends or colleagues.
P. 8 5
Contacts Activate Xperia
™
phonebook application to manage contacts of
your friends or colleagues.
−
SD card backup An application to move or back up data such as phonebook entries,
sp-mode mails, bookmarks, etc. using external memory such as
microSD card.
P. 2 1 9
sp
モードメール
(sp-
mode mail)
Send/receive mails using docomo mail address (@docomo.ne.jp).
You can use pictogram and Deco-mail. Mails can be received
automatically.
P. 9 6
Area Mail Receive early warning "Area Mail" and view received Area Mail. P.107
Disaster kit An application which helps you to record and check messages on
the docomo Disaster Message Board.
−
Instruction Manual Display the terminal instruction manual. You can start a function
you want to use from the explanation (in Japanese only).
* See "About manuals of SO-02E" in "Introduction".
−
Setup guide Display Setup guide. P.31
Icon Applications Description Page
Media Player Play music and videos. P.201
WALKMAN Playback music data stored on the internal storage or microSD card.
−
1Seg Watch 1Seg program. P.167
G
ガイド番組表
(Program table)
View ground-based broadcasting, BS digital broadcasting.
Searching programs by key words or categories, watching 1Seg,
and remote recording of 1Seg program from outside are available.
−
Video Unlimited Connect to "Video Unlimited" which allows you to download
favorite videos and watch them anywhere.
−
Music Unlimited Connect to "Music Unlimited" which allows you to listen to music
around the world anytime and anywhere.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
70
docomo Palette UI
■
Tools
■
Osaifu/Shopping
電子書籍
Reader by
Sony (eBook Reader by
Sony)
You can buy topical books or popular comics from SONY's eBook
store "Reader Store" whenever you like.
−
FM radio Use FM radio. P.174
Movies Acquire video information etc.
−
Connected devices Set and manage media server via Connected devices, and connect
DLNA device to the terminal via Wi-Fi network to share files.
P. 1 5 9
Facebook Activate Facebook client application. P.136
Timescape
™
View Social Networking Service (SNS) history. P.204
Album View photos and videos you took, and images posted on Picasa or
Facebook.
P. 1 9 5
PSM
を始めよう
(Let's
start PSM)
Show dedicated website for the "PS Store".
Download games to play on the terminal.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
Camera Take photos and record video clips. P.175
Memo Create/Manage memos. It supports i-concier service.
−
Schedule Create/Manage schedule. It supports i-concier service.
−
Infrared An application which allows you to send and receive phonebook
data, etc. via infrared communication.
P. 1 5 3
IC Tag/Barcode Reader Read IC Tag and barcode.
−
Calculator Perform basic calculations such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division.
−
Alarm & clock Set alarm and view clock. P.215
OfficeSuite View and read Office documents. P.221
Icon Applications Description Page
Osaifu-Keitai Use Osaifu-Keitai. P.163
Icon Applications Description Page
71
docomo Palette UI
■
Settings
■
Google
iD
設定アプリ
(iD
setting application)
Make settings for use of electronic money, iD. P.165
ToruCa Acquire, display, search, or refresh ToruCa. P.166
Icon Applications Description Page
Settings Make the terminal settings. P.112
遠隔サポート
(Remote
support)
An application for using "
スマートフォンあんしん遠隔サポート
(Smartphone Anshin Remote Support)". With "
スマートフォンあんし
ん遠隔サポート
(Smartphone Anshin Remote Support)", call center
staff can provide operational support while checking your terminal
screen remotely.
−
Xperia Start Up Access Google Play to download applications to make use of Xperia
even more useful and fun.
−
Update Center Update the latest software or application. P.240
−
Flash Player Settings Change settings for controlling application running method in
Flash Player.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
Email Send and receive emails (multiple accounts are also available). P.99
Gmail Send and receive mails from/to a Google account. P.106
Messaging Send and receive messages (SMS). P.96
Talk Chat with friends using Google Talk instant messaging. P.106
Browser Browse Web and WAP sites (except for WML) and download files. P.108
Search Search information in the terminal and web pages from keywords. P.39
Downloads View a list of files downloaded from websites.
−
Play Store Access to the Google Play, download and buy new applications. P.162
YouTube Playback videos around the world or upload recorded videos. P.198
Icon Applications Description Page
72
docomo Palette UI
■
Recommends
Play Movies An application for accessing movie rental service of Google Play.
Select a movie you want to watch and rent it.
−
Calendar Display a calendar and manage schedule. P.213
Maps Use Google map services, such as viewing current location, finding
another location and calculating routes.
P. 2 0 9
Navigation Display Google map navigation to receive detailed guides for your
destination.
P. 2 1 1
Local Use various information registered on Google map, such as shops
around the current location.
P. 2 1 0
Latitude Check and share the location information of specified friends. P.212
Google+ Activate Social Network Service (SNS) client application "Google+"
provided by Google.
−
Messenger Chat with friends using Google+ instant messaging.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
Anshin Scan Protect your terminal from damage by virus. Detect virus hidden in
installed applications or microSD card.
−
Book Store MyShelf An application for viewing e-books you purchased on the dmarket
BOOK store.
−
HighlightCam Analyze photos and videos you took, and automatically edit them
to create a new video. You can select template and BGM according
to the scenes. Created videos can easily be posted to SNS etc.
−
Twitter Official client application for Twitter. Post a short message on public
on the website to communicate with others.
−
地図アプリ
(Map
Application)
Functions such as
地図
(Map),
お店や施設検索
(Shop and facility
search),
ナビ
(Navigation),
乗換
(Transfer function),
訪れた街
(Visited
places) support your outing.
−
Name card creator Create original name card to display in the My profile field of
docomo "Phonebook" application.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
73
docomo Palette UI
❖
Information
･
From the Home screen, tap and tap "Recommends" tab to display applications recommended by DOCOMO.
For details, see "Installing "Recommends" applications" (P.76).
･
Some application names may not be displayed fully.
･
Some applications require downloading and installation. If you cannot download application by tapping, from
the Home screen, tap and tap [Settings]
u
[Security]
u
[Unknown sources]
u
[OK], mark the checkbox and
then tap the application.
･
Activating two or more applications may increase battery consumption and the operation time may become
short. For this reason, it is recommended to end applications when not used. To end the application, on the
application screen you are using, tap
x
to display the Home screen (P.60).
･
If you selected Japanese as a language in Initial settings (P.31), some group names are displayed in Japanese
even after the language setting is changed. These group names can be changed to English (P.74).
ドコモ海外利用
(International
roaming)
An application which supports using packet communication
overseas. You can set Data roaming setting or a network operator
applicable for international Pake-hodai easily.
−
eco
モード
(eco mode) An application to set "eco mode" for reducing battery consumption
by adjusting each setting such as display brightness.
−
Icon Applications Description Page
74
docomo Palette UI
From the Application screen, you can add
icons, sort icons, uninstall applications. Also
you can change group setting.
Adding an application icon to the
Home screen
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold an icon you want to add
to the Home screen.
2
Tap [Add].
･
The application icon is added onto the
Home screen.
❖
Information
･
Touch and hold an area of the Home screen where
no icons are displayed and tap [Shortcut]
u
[Application] and select an application to add an
icon.
Sorting application icons
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold an application icon you
want to sort.
2
Drag it anywhere.
･
The application icon moves.
❖
Information
･
To move an application icon to another application
group, touch and hold the icon on the Application
screen, tap [Move], then select a group you want to
move to. Alternatively, to move an icon, you can
touch and hold an icon on the Application screen,
then drag it to the group you want to move to.
Uninstalling an application
Some application icons can be deleted from
the Application screen.
･
Before uninstalling application, back up
contents related to the application that you
want to save including data saved in the
application.
･
Some applications or widgets may not be
uninstalled.
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold an icon of application
you want to uninstall.
2
Tap [Uninstall].
･
Uninstall screen appears.
3
Tap [OK]
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
You can also uninstall them from the Settings menu.
For details, see "Deleting installed application" (P.132).
Changing the Application
screen
75
docomo Palette UI
Adding a shortcut of group to the
Home screen
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold an icon you want to add
to the Home screen.
2
Tap [Add].
･
Shortcuts to the group is added to the
Home screen.
❖
Information
･
Touch and hold an area of the Home screen where
no icons are displayed and tap [Group] and select a
group to add a shortcut.
Changing a label color of the group
name
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold a group you want to
change the color.
2
Tap [Edit label] and select label
color to change.
･
The color for group name is changed.
Deleting a group
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold a group you want to
delete.
2
Tap [Delete]
u
[OK].
･
Application icons belonged to the
deleted group move to the "Download
Application" group.
❖
Information
･
"Recently", "DOCOMO Services", and "Download
Application" groups cannot be deleted.
Changing a group name
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold a group you want to
rename.
2
Tap [Edit name].
3
Enter a group name in the [Group
name] entry box and tap [OK].
･
The group is renamed.
❖
Information
･
"Recently", "DOCOMO Services", and "Download
Application" groups cannot be renamed.
Adding a group
1
From the Application screen, tap
and tap [Add group].
2
Enter a group name in the [Group
name] entry box and tap [OK].
･
A new group is added.
76
docomo Palette UI
Sorting groups
1
From the Application screen, touch
and hold a group name you want
to sort.
2
Drag it anywhere.
･
The group is moved.
You can view and access recently used
applications from this window.
1
Tap
r
.
･
Recently used applications appear on a
list. Tap an application to activate. Flick
left or right to delete from the list.
❖
Information
･
On the recently used applications list screen, touch
and hold an application to select [Remove from list]/
[App info].
Search application installed into the terminal
to activate.
1
From the Application screen, tap
and then tap [Search].
･
When you use for the first time, the
Terms of Service window for Google
Search appears. Read the terms of use
and tap [OK].
･
The software keyboard appears.
2
Enter application name you want
to search in the search box.
･
Search suggestions appear as you enter
a character.
3
Tap a search item.
･
The application activates.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap , then
tap [Search] to search application. For details, refer to
"Searching information in the terminal and web
pages" (P.39).
Opening the recently used
applications window
Searching applications
77
docomo Palette UI
Icons on the Application screen can be
displayed in a list or tiles.
1
From the Application screen, tap
and then tap [List format]/[Tile
format].
The "Recommends" tab in the Application
screen shows applications recommended by
DOCOMO.
（
P. 6 6
）
1
From the Application screen, tap
[Recommends] tab.
2
Tap an application.
･
Download screen opens. Follow the
onscreen instructions.
❖
Information
･
Downloaded applications are displayed in
"Download Application" group on "Application" tab
in the Application screen.
･
Tap [
もっとアプリを見る
(More apps)] on the
[Recommends] tab to display "dmenu".
1
From the Application screen, tap
and then tap [Application info].
･
The home application information
appears.
Switching application screens
Installing "Recommends"
applications
Checking Home application
information
78
Phone
Phone
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial] tab.
2
Enter the number of the recipient
and tap .
･
If a wrong number is entered, tap
to delete the number.
❖
Information
･
To activate Xperia
™
phone application, from the
Home screen, tap , then tap [Dial].
Entering pause (,)
This function allows you to operate voice
mail at home, to reserve tickets, or to check
the balance of a bank account, etc.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial] tab.
2
Enter the phone number, then tap
and tap [Add 2–sec pause].
When the terminal is within range of the
service area, you can make an emergency call
of 110 (Police), 119 (Fire and ambulance), or
118 (Japan Coast Guard).
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial].
2
Enter the number of the
emergency call and tap .
･
If a wrong number is entered, tap
to delete the number.
❖
Note
･
If docomo mini UIM card is not inserted to the
terminal, emergency calls (110, 119, 118) cannot be
made in Japan.
･
You can make an emergency call by tapping
[Emergency call] on the screen unlocking screen. In
Japan, however, when the power ON, on the PIN
code entry screen (P.141), or on the PUK entry screen
(P.142), emergency calls (110, 119, 118) cannot be
made even if you tap [Emergency call].
･
If SIM card lock is set in Airplane mode, emergency
call cannot be made.
･
This terminal supports "Emergency call location
information". If you use the terminal to place a call to
emergency numbers such as 110, 119, or 118, the
information of a location where you are calling from
(location information) is automatically notified to the
Emergency call acceptance organization such as the
Police Station.
The Emergency call acceptance organization may not
be able to figure out your exact location depending
Making/Receiving a call
Making a call
Emergency call
79
Phone
on the location where you place a call or radio wave
condition.
If you make a call hiding your caller ID, such as by
entering a phone number with "184" for each call, the
location information and phone number are not
notified. However, the Emergency call acceptance
organization may decide to obtain the location
information and phone number regardless of your
settings when they consider it is necessary for
lifesaving, etc. Note that the areas/time for which the
"Emergency call location information" is ready to be
used vary depending on the preparatory state of each
Emergency call acceptance organization.
･
When calling 110, 119 or 118 for emergency from the
terminal, tell that you are calling from a mobile
phone, and give your phone number and your
current location precisely for checking callback from
the police/fire department. Also, make a point to call
in a stationary position to prevent the call from being
dropped. Do not power off the terminal for at least
10 minutes after the emergency call just in case the
Police or Fire/Ambulance may have to get in contact
with you.
･
Note that you may not connect to the local Fire
Department or Police Station depending on where
you are calling from. In this case, try to call from a
public phone or an ordinary phone in the
neighborhood.
1
Tap [End call].
For details on WORLD CALL, refer to
DOCOMO International Services website.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial] tab.
2
Touch and hold [0] key until "+"
sign appears.
･
When making an international call, "+"
is replaced by an international access
code.
3
Enter Country code
u
Area code
(City code)
u
The number of the
recipient and tap .
･
If the area code begins with "0", omit "0".
However, "0" may be required to dial to
some countries or areas such as Italy.
1
While receiving a call, touch and
hold (left) and drag it to
(right).
❖
Information
･
If you are using regular headphones without a
microphone, you need to speak to the microphone
of the terminal.
･
During the screen lock, the icon appears and you can
answer a call by the same operation.
Ending a call
Making an international call
(WORLD CALL)
Receiving a call
80
Phone
1
When receiving a call, press
m
/
p
.
❖
Information
･
You can stop vibration by pressing
m
/
p
when silent mode (vibration) is set.
･
From the Home screen, press
m
to mute the
ringtone for an incoming call.
1
While receiving a call, touch and
hold (right) and drag it to
(left).
❖
Information
･
During the screen lock, the icon appears and you can
reject a call by the same operation.
･
If you reject an incoming call during use of Voice Mail
Service, the call is connected to the Voice Mail
service center.
When you cannot answer a call, you can
reject the call and send a message (SMS).
Message to send is registered in advance, and
you can edit it if necessary.
1
Drag upwards when
receiving a call.
2
Tap a message to send.
･
The message (SMS) is sent to the caller.
❖
Information
･
While Voice Mail service is in use, a call is rejected and
a message (SMS) is sent then the caller is connected
to the Voice Mail service center.
･
To create a new message to send, when receiving a
call, drag up and tap to
create a message and send. To edit a message, from
the Home screen, tap and , then tap [Call
settings]
u
[Reject call with message] to select and
edit an existing message, then tap [OK].
Muting the ringtone for an
incoming call
Declining a call
Declining an incoming call and
sending a message (SMS)
81
Phone
You can make or answer a call with Stereo
Headset with Microphone (Sample)
connecting to the terminal.
■
Making a call
1
Make a call with Stereo Headset
with Microphone (Sample)
connected.
･
An operation of making a call is the
same as usual operation. (P.77)
2
Press the switch to end the call.
■
Receiving a call
1
While receiving a call, press the
switch of Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample).
･
The call is connected.
･
When receiving a call, you can decline
the call by pressing the switch for a
second or more.
2
To end a call, press the switch
again.
❖
Information
･
While listening to music with Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample) connecting to the terminal,
you can answer a call by pressing the switch. Music
pauses on calling. Music restarts when ending the
call automatically depending on the player
application.
･
Connecting and removing Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample) repeatedly during a call may
disconnect a call.
Using Stereo Headset with
Microphone
82
Phone
1
During a call, press
m
to
adjust.
❖
Information
･
You can adjust the ear speaker volume only during a
call.
■
Calling screen
a
Name of the other party
b
A photo saved in Phonebook
c
Call duration time
d
Speaker : Set speakerphone on/off.
･
Other party's voice can be heard from the speaker
and handsfree call can be made.
･
When the speakerphone is on, a speakerphone
icon appears in the status bar.
e
Phonebook : View phonebook entry list screen.
f
Option menu : Set Hold during a call.
･
To cancel Hold, tap [Retrieve call] during Hold.
･
To set a call on hold, "Call waiting" subscription is
required. (P.84)
g
Number of the other party
h
Mute : Set muting on/off of the microphone during
a call.
･
When the microphone is muted, a mute icon
appears in the status bar.
i
Dial key : Enter the phone number you want to add
to make a call.
･
The ongoing call is automatically on hold.
･
To add a call, "Call waiting" subscription is
required. (P.84)
j
End call
❖
Note
･
Do not bring the terminal close to your ear with the
speakerphone on to avoid from hearing damage.
Adjusting the ear speaker
volume
Operations during a call
e
g
a
j
i
b
c
h
f
d
83
Phone
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Recent calls] tab.
･
The Recent calls screen appears.
On the Recent calls screen, incoming call
history and outgoing call history are
displayed in chronological order.
a
Incoming history
b
Call status icons
: Caller ID notified
: Caller ID hidden
･
Notified if calls are made with "186" (Notify)/"184"
(Hide) prefixed to the number.
･
If you enter a phone number and tap , then
select [Caller ID notification]
u
[Notify]/[Not notify]
to make a call, / does not appear in the
call log list.
: Koe-no-Takuhaibin
･
For details on Koe-no-Takuhaibin, refer to "Koe-
no-Takuhaibin" (P.84) or NTT DOCOMO website.
: Outgoing international call
: Incoming international call
c
Phone number/name
d
Consecutive calls with the same party
･
Tap a history or to display combined history,
tap again to display individually.
･
Number in bracket indicates number of
combined history.
e
Outgoing history
f
Outgoing
g
History icons
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
h
Date
i
Phonebook
❖
Information
･
On the Recent calls screen, tap and tap [Search
location] to check the current location of the party
using imadocokantan search. To set/edit "Network
service" or "Reject call with message", tap and tap
[Call settings]. (P.84)
Call history
Showing call history
Recent calls screen
a
b
c
e
g
h
i
d
f
84
Phone
When you have missed calls, appears in
the status bar.
1
Drag the status bar downwards.
2
Tap [Missed call].
❖
Information
･
When you set the screen lock to "Slide", a missed call
icon appears on the screen unlock screen for missed
calls. For the setting to show or hide icons, see
"Setting information displayed on the unlock screen"
(P.128).
1
On the Recent calls screen (P.82),
tap .
1
On the Recent calls screen (P.82),
touch and hold a phone number,
tap [Edit number before
call]
u
[Add Phonebook].
･
You can also save by tapping the
number and then [Add Phonebook] at
the bottom of the screen.
2
Tap desired phonebook entry, or
tap [Register new].
･
When you set Google account etc., tap
[Register new] to select an account to
register.
3
On the profile editing screen, enter
information and tap [Save].
1
On the Recent calls screen (P.82),
tap .
2
Tap [Delete all]
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
To delete only an item of call log, on the Recent calls
list screen (P.82), touch and hold a call log you want
to delete and tap [Delete from call log]
u
[OK].
･
To delete all any of "Incoming history" or "Outgoing
history", on the Recent calls list screen (P.82), tap
[Incoming history]/[Outgoing history] and tap ,
then [Delete all]
u
[OK].
Displaying missed calls
Making a call from call history
Adding a number from the call
history to Phonebook
Deleting a call history
85
Phone
You can use the network services and search
for available networks.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings].
･
You can set the following options.
Call settings
Network
service
Koe-no-
Takuhaibin
Koe-no-Takuhaibin is a
service of taking voice
messages for you.
Voice mail
service
It is a service of taking
caller's message when
you cannot answer an
incoming call.
Call
forwarding
service
It is a service of
transferring call when
you cannot answer an
incoming call.
Call Waiting
It is a service of putting
the current call on hold
and answering an
incoming call or making
a call to another party.
Caller ID
notification
Notify the display of the
recipient phone of your
phone number.
Nuisance
call blocking
service
Register phone numbers
of nuisance call to reject.
Network
Service
Caller ID
display
request
service
Request number
notification for calls
without phone number
with guidance.
Second call
settings
Set action for additional
incoming call during a
call.
Call
notification
Notify incoming calls by
SMS while the power is
off or you are out of
service area.
English
guidance
Set voice guidance to
English.
Remote
operation
settings
Set to operate Voice Mail
Service or Call
forwarding Service using
land-line phone, public
phone or DOCOMO
mobile phone, etc.
Roaming
settings
P. 2 2 8
Advanced
call settings
Set whether to reject an incoming call
with phone number that is
unregistered in the Phonebook
automatically.
Reject call
with
message
Edit/Set a message (SMS) to be sent
when rejecting an incoming call.
Service
providers
When you start using overseas or move
out of your operator's network, the
terminal searches another available
network and reconnects to it.
Noise
suppression
Make the voice clear to understand for
the other party during a call.
86
Phone
In the Phonebook, you can enter various
information for contacts, for example, phone
numbers, mail addresses and web service
accounts. You can display phonebook entry
to get quick access to that contact.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Phonebook].
･
The phonebook list screen appears.
･
Alternatively, from the Home screen,
tap and tap [Phonebook] to display
phonebook list screen.
❖
Information
･
To activate Xperia
™
phone application, from the
Home screen, tap , then tap [Contacts].
On the phonebook list screen, you can view
details of your contacts. You can add a
picture to a phonebook entry, and display
phonebook entries by group.
a
Contacts tab
b
Name registered in the phonebook entry
c
Entry items
･
Icons indicate entry items.
d
Photo set in the phonebook entry
e
Register
f
Group
･
Select a group to be displayed.
g
Communication tab
･
Display call history, sp-mode mail history,
message (SMS) history. You can call or send a
message (SMS) from history.
h
TimeLine tab
･
TimeLine for SNS or Blog set in Linking to SNS
function appears. Tap to show detailed screen
and post comment or Like.
Accounts
Set Internet phone (SIP) account.
Use Internet
calling
Set Internet phone (SIP) call method.
Phonebook
Opening Phonebook
Phonebook list screen
l
a
g h
c
d
b
f
e
j
i
k
m
87
Phone
i
Option menu
j
My profile tab
･
Check your own phone number.
k
Index character area
･
Tap index character to display phonebook entries
allocated to the index character.
l
Index
･
Display the index character to search entries in
the order of Japanese syllabary, alphabet, etc.
m
Search
Adding a new phonebook entry
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [Register].
･
When you set Google account etc., you
can select an account to add.
2
Entering name on the profile
editing screen.
3
Select a desired item to enter.
･
You can set phone number, mail
address, group, etc. Tap in "Others",
then tap [Add] to add information.
4
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
When you save "Phonetic name (family/given)",
phonebook list is displayed according to Japanese
syllabary order or alphabets order of "Phonetic
name". If you enter "family/given" in Kanji without
entering "Phonetic name" to add phonebook entry,
the name appear in "ABC" field on the phonebook list
screen.
･
To check the number of registered data in the
Phonebook, from the phonebook list screen (P.85),
tap , and [Others]
u
[About].
･
If you set [Xperia
™
] on "Set all to" in Preferred apps
settings (P.60) and register contact in "Contacts"
application, you can select "Phone contact" as saving
location and set ringtone. When "docomo" is set in
Preferred apps settings (P.60), ringtone set on "Phone
contact" account cannot be changed.
･
If "docomo" account is selected as saving location
when registering phonebook entries, SNS/Blog
accounts can be set.
Managing phonebook
88
Phone
Using shortcuts of Phonebook
When you tap the photo (image) part on the
phonebook list screen, shortcuts for phone,
mail, etc. appear. Tap the shortcut to make a
call, or create and send a mail.
* You can also use the registered addresses, etc.
❖
Information
･
When you tap a part other than photo (image) on
the phonebook list screen, profile screen of the
phonebook appears instead of shortcuts.
･
Email shortcut appears when email address is saved
in the selected phonebook entry and you have set
your email account. If you have not set your email
account, shortcut for Gmail ( ) appears.
･
For a phonebook entry with only name, tapping
photo (image) does not display the shortcut.
Making a call using the phonebook
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry to
call.
2
On the Profile screen, tap a phone
number.
3
Tap [Call].
Searching for a phonebook entry
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [Search].
2
Enter name or reading you want to
search in the search field.
･
All phonebook entries beginning with
those letters appear.
Changing contacts display order
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Contacts display order].
2
Tap [Japanese order]/
[Alphabetical order]/[Number
order].
Make a call to saved phone number.
Create and send message (SMS).
Select Email application to create and send an
email.
･
If [Use by default for this action.] checkbox is
marked, application selection screen will not
appear for the next time.
89
Phone
Changing accounts to display
You can set registered phonebook entries to
be displayed in the phonebook list.
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Accounts to display].
2
Tap [Display all accounts]/
[docomo]/[Phone contacts].
･
When "Phone contacts" is set as a
saving location, "Phone contacts" is
used as a phonebook. (P.86)
･
When you set Google account etc.,
select an account to be displayed.
･
Tap [Customize...], select a checkbox for
each account, and then customize
display of the phonebook list screen.
Displaying phonebook entries by
group
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [Groups].
2
Tap a group.
･
Phonebook entries are displayed by the
group set when the entry is registered.
･
To hide the group, tap [Close].
Setting group for phonebook entry
You can set phonebook entries registered to
docomo account to a group from the
phonebook list screen.
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [Groups] and touch and
hold a phonebook entry to set a
group, and then drag it to any
group.
❖
Information
･
To cancel group setting, on the phonebook list
screen (P.85), tap [Groups] and touch and hold a
phonebook entry you want to cancel the group
setting, and then drag it to set group.
･
When you set Google account etc., display groups by
account. You can set/cancel group in the same
account.
Creating a new group in Phonebook
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [Groups]
u
[Add].
･
When "Add" is not displayed, flick on
groups to display.
2
Tap [docomo].
･
When you set Google account etc., you
can select it as an account to add.
90
Phone
3
On the group addition screen,
enter color, icon, group name, and
tap [OK].
･
The items vary depending on the
account type.
❖
Information
･
You can edit/delete newly created groups and
"Family"/"Friends"/"Company", which are saved by
default. To edit a group, touch and hold a group and
tap [Edit group], then enter group name etc. and tap
[OK]. To delete a group, touch and hold a group and
tap [Delete group], then tap [OK]. Phonebook entries
belonged to the deleted group move to the "No
group" tab.
･
You cannot add a group that has the same name as
existing groups.
Editing a phonebook entry
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry to
edit.
2
On the profile screen, tap [Edit].
3
Select a required item and edit.
･
Tap [Add] to set phone number or mail
address, and tap on "Others" and
[Add] to add information.
4
Tap [Save].
Registering a phonebook entry to
Favorites
You can mark a phonebook entry as a
favorite. The favorite list provides quick
access to the phonebook entry you have
marked.
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry you
want to mark.
2
On the profile screen, tap .
❖
Information
･
Only phonebook entries saved to the docomo
account can be added to Favorites.
･
To save a phonebook entry to Favorites, alternatively,
tap [Groups] on the phonebook list screen (P.85) and
touch and hold a phonebook entry you want to save
to Favorites, then drag it onto "Favorites".
･
To display phonebook entries added to Favorites, on
the phonebook list screen, tap [Groups]
u
[Favorites],
or from the Home screen, tap and then tap
[Favorites] tab.
Setting photo in a phonebook entry
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry you
want to add a picture.
2
On the profile screen, tap [Edit].
3
Tap [Setting] for image.
91
Phone
4
Tap [Take photo]/[Select picture].
･
After shooting a photo or selecting an
image, drag or pinch adjusting a
trimming frame to set range for
displaying image, and then tap [Crop].
5
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
You can also set photo to a phonebook entry by the
following operation.
From the Home screen, tap , then tap [Album].
Select an image you want to set and tap the screen
and , then tap [Use as]
u
[Photo of phonebook].
Select a phonebook entry you want to register, set
image range to be displayed, and then tap [Crop].
Setting ringtone
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry to
set ringtone.
2
On the profile screen, tap and
[Set ringtone].
3
Select a ringtone and tap [Done].
❖
Information
･
To set a ringtone other than the ones stored by
default, tap .
･
Depending on the saving account, ringtone can be
set when saving a phonebook entry.
Combining phonebook entries
You can bind multiple phonebook entries
together into one.
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap a phonebook entry to
combine.
2
On the profile screen, tap and
[Join/Separate].
･
Phonebook entries to be combined are
displayed.
3
Tap the phonebook entry to
combine.
❖
Information
･
To cancel binding, on the profile screen of the
phonebook, tap , then tap [Join/
Separate]
u
[Separate].
Deleting a phonebook entry
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap [Delete].
2
Mark the phonebook entry you
want to delete.
･
If you want to delete all phonebook
entries, tap [Select all].
3
Tap [Delete]
u
[OK].
92
Phone
❖
Information
･
To delete only an item of phonebook entry, on the
phonebook list screen (P.85), tap a phonebook entry
you want to delete and tap , then tap
[Delete]
u
[OK].
Checking My profile and editing
information
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap [My profile].
2
Tap [Edit].
3
On the My profile screen, enter
necessary information.
･
Tap [Add] to set phone number or mail
address, and tap [Set] to add SNS or
Blog account. Tap in "Others", then
tap [Add] to add information.
4
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
You can register multiple phone numbers, mail
addresses, SNS/Blog accounts, etc. in My profile.
･
Name card data created with name card creator
application can be saved to My profile and the name
card data can be exchanged via network. When you
use for the first time, on the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap the [My profile] tab and [Create new] and
follow the onscreen instructions.
Displaying SNS information in
phonebook
Set up SNS or Blog account to start/stop
Linking SNS function. Setting up Linking SNS
function allows you to browse messages for
SNS/Blog in "TimeLine" in the phonebook
entry list screen and post messages or
photos.
■
Starting
1
Tap [My profile] on the phonebook
list screen (P.85).
2
Tap [Edit], tap [Set] for "SNS
・
Blog", and tap [OK].
3
Tap [Start right now] to register
accounts for SNS or Blog.
･
After this step, follow the onscreen
instructions.
■
Stopping
1
Tap [My profile] on the phonebook
list screen (P.85).
2
Tap , tap [General
settings]
u
[Stop Linking to
SNS]
u
[Stop
service]
u
[Stop]
u
[Close].
93
Phone
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, to start Linking to SNS, tap [TimeLine]
tab in the phonebook entry list screen (P.85) and tap
[Start right now] to register SNS/Blog account
information.
･
SNS information cannot be displayed for phonebook
entries saved in other than docomo account.
･
To display SNS information, from the phonebook
entry list screen (P.85), tap , tap [Others]
u
Tap
[Linking to SNS settings] and select SNS account and
user to display and tap [End]. Or select entry in the
phonebook entry list screen (P.85) and tap [Edit] and
tap [Set] in [SNS
・
Blog], then select SNS account and
user and tap [End].
Sending phonebook entries via
infrared communication
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Send data(infrared)].
･
To send an entry, tap [Send one], select
entry to send then tap [OK]
u
[OK].
･
To send all phonebook entries, tap
[Send all]
u
Tap [Start], enter docomo
apps password, tap [OK], then enter the
same authentication password as that
of the recipient and tap [OK]
u
[OK]
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
When sending all phonebook entries via infrared
communication, you need to enter authentication
password an docomo apps password.
Authentication password is a 4-digit number fixed up
between you and other party in advance. For details
of docomo apps password, refer to "docomo apps
password" (P.134).
･
To activate infrared communication in a selected
phonebook entry, tap in the profile screen,
[Infrared]
u
[OK]
u
[OK]. To send My profile, tap [My
profile] on the phonebook entry list screen (P.85), tap
, [Send via infrared]
u
[OK]
u
[OK]. If a name card is
stored in My profile, tapping [Send via infrared]
opens a screen to select [send my profile] or
[Exchange name card (via infrared)].
･
Phonebook entries can be sent using "Infrared" app.
For details, see "Sending data via infrared
communication" (P.155).
Sending phonebook via Bluetooth/
Email/Gmail
Registered phonebook and My profile
information can be sent using Bluetooth
function (P.156), or email attachment
function.
■
Sending phonebook
1
Tap a phonebook entry you want
to send on the phonebook list
screen (P.85).
2
On the profile screen, tap and
[Share].
94
Phone
3
Select sending method and follow
the onscreen instructions.
■
Sending My profile
1
Tap [My profile] on the phonebook
list screen (P.85).
2
Tap and [Share].
3
Select sending method and follow
the onscreen instructions.
❖
Information
･
To use Bluetooth function, turn on Bluetooth
function (P.156) in advance or select [Bluetooth] in
Step 3 then tap [Turn on].
･
If you want to send data as files attached to email/
Gmail, send from the compose screen for the mail
service in which you have set an account. When you
have not set a Gmail account, setup wizard appears.
You can create and send email after settings are
done.
･
Messaging (SMS) is not available.
･
You cannot send some information such as name
card data set in phonebook.
･
For sending all phonebook entries, see "Sharing
phonebook entry currently displayed" (P.93).
Sharing phonebook entry currently
displayed
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Import/Export].
2
Tap [Share phonebook data].
3
Select sending method and follow
the onscreen instructions.
･
If [Use by default for this action.]
checkbox is marked, application
selection screen will not appear for the
next time.
❖
Information
･
If display conditions for phonebook (P.88) are set,
only phonebook entries to be displayed are
exported.
･
To use Bluetooth function, turn on Bluetooth
function (P.156) in advance or select [Bluetooth] in
Step 3 then tap [Turn on].
･
If you want to send data as files attached to email/
Gmail, send from the compose screen for the mail
service in which you have set an account. When you
have not set a Gmail account, setup wizard appears.
You can create and send email after settings are
done.
･
Messaging (SMS) is not available.
･
You cannot send some information such as name
card data set in phonebook.
You can export/import phonebook entries
from/to microSD card or docomo mini UIM
card. This is useful, for example, when you
want to transfer the contact information to
another phone.
Exporting/Importing
phonebook entries
95
Phone
❖
Information
･
You can also use a synchronization service for
synchronizing your phonebook. For details, refer to
"Setting Auto-sync" (P.137).
Exporting phonebook to microSD
card
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Import/Export].
2
Tap [Export to SD card].
3
Select a phonebook you want to
export.
･
Tap to select any of [Export one contact
data]/[Export some contact data]/
[Export all contact data], then tap [OK].
･
When [Export one contact data]/
[Export some contact data] is selected
and tap [OK], select a contact you want
to export and tap [OK].
4
Select [Yes]/[No] to attach name
card.
5
Tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, on the phonebook list screen, tap [My
profile] tab, then tap and [General
settings]
u
[Data management]
u
[Export] to export
phonebook entries to microSD card.
Importing phonebook from microSD
card
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Import/Export].
2
Tap [Import from SD card].
･
When you set Google account etc.,
select an account.
3
Select vCard file you want to
import.
･
If there is only one file, vCard file
selection screen does not appear. The
file is imported immediately.
･
If a file has multiple phonebook entries,
they are imported all at once.
･
If there are two or more vCard files, tap
any of [Import one phonebook data]/
[Import multiple phonebook data]/
[Import all phonebook data] to select.
4
Tap [OK].
･
If you select [Import one phonebook
data]/[Import multiple phonebook
data] and tap [OK], select vCard files to
import then tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
For some phonebook entries, a part of data may not
be imported or exported.
96
Phone
･
Alternatively, on the phonebook list screen, tap [My
profile] tab, then tap and [General
settings]
u
[Data management]
u
[Import]
u
[Import
from SD card] to import phonebook entries from a
microSD card.
Importing phonebook entries from
docomo mini UIM card
1
On the phonebook list screen
(P.85), tap , then tap
[Others]
u
[Import/Export].
2
Tap [Import from SIM card].
･
When you set Google account etc.,
select an account.
3
To import one entry, tap an entry
you want to import.
･
To import all phonebook entries, tap
and [Import all phonebook data].
･
If there is a phonebook entry whose
name is matched with the imported
entry, the entry is imported as a
separated one.
❖
Information
･
Names and phone numbers can be imported.
･
Alternatively, on the phonebook list screen, tap [My
profile] tab, then tap and [General
settings]
u
[Data management]
u
[Import]
u
[Import
from SIM card] to import contacts from the docomo
mini UIM card.
･
To export phonebook entries to docomo mini UIM
card, use Xperia
™
phonebook application. Note that
only name and the first phone number can be saved
because of memory space of docomo mini UIM card.
For some phonebook entries, a part of data may not
be exported.
An application to move or back up data of
phonebook, sp-mode mail, bookmark, etc.
using external memory such as microSD card.
For SD card backup, see "SD card backup"
(P.219).
Using SD card backup
97
Mail/Web browser
Mail/Web browse r
Send/receive mails using DOCOMO mail
address (@docomo.ne.jp).
You can use pictogram and Deco-mail. Mails
can be received automatically. For details on
sp-mode mail, refer to "
ご利用ガイドブック
(sp
モード編
) (Mobile Phone User's Guide [sp-
mode]) (in Japanese only)".
1
From the Home screen, tap .
2
Flick the screen, then tap [
ダウン
ロード
(Download)].
･
After this step, follow the instructions
on the screen.
❖
Information
･
When the screen lock (P.142) is set to "Slide", a
notification icon for sp-mode mail reception can be
displayed on the unlock screen. For the setting to
show or hide icons, see "Setting information
displayed on the unlock screen" (P.128).
･
sp-mode mail data can be backed up in a microSD
card using "SD card backup". For information on
backing up, see "SD card backup" (P.219).
You can send and receive text messages up
to 70 two-byte characters (up to 160 one-
byte characters) with a mobile phone
number as the destination.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Tap (New mail).
3
Tap , then mark a checkbox for
the other party to send to from the
contacts list.
･
When you enter a name or phone
number in the box at the top of the
screen, a list of contacts beginning with
the entered numbers or letters appears.
･
You can input phone number directly
by tapping [To:].
4
Tap [Done].
5
Tap [Write message] and enter a
message.
･
Tap and [Select message template]
to enter by selecting texts from
templates registered in "Message
template settings" (P.98).
sp-mode mail Message (SMS)
Sending message (SMS)
98
Mail/Web browser
･
When the number of entered
characters comes close to a limit, a
counter appears on the upper left of
the text box and you can check the
remaining entry space.
6
Tap [Send].
❖
Information
･
For the character entry, see "Character entry" (P.40).
･
You can also send/receive text messages to/from
customers of overseas network operators. See
"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"
or the DOCOMO International Services website.
･
To send SMS to users of overseas network operators,
enter "+", "Country code" and then "the recipient
mobile phone number". Enter the phone number
without a leading "0", if any. You can also enter "010",
"Country code" and "the recipient mobile phone
number" to send messages (To reply to the received
SMS overseas, enter "010").
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Tap someone whose messages you
want to read from the recipient
list.
･
A message (SMS) appears.
❖
Information
･
When you receive a message (SMS), appears on
the status bar. To read the message (SMS), drag the
status bar downward, tap an item of notified
message (SMS).
･
When the screen lock (P.142) is set to "Slide", a
notification icon for message (SMS) reception can be
displayed on the unlock screen. For the setting to
show or hide icons, see "Setting information
displayed on the unlock screen" (P.128).
･
Tap / in the message (SMS) to turn to
(yellow). From the Home screen, tap , then tap
[Messaging]
u
Tap and [Starred messages] to
quickly access to the mail you have marked.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Select a thread whose phone
number you want to save.
3
Tap and then [Add to Contacts].
4
Tap [Register new].
･
When you set Google account etc., you
can select an account to add.
5
Enter required items and tap
[Save].
Receiving and reading message
(SMS)
Saving phone number of
message (SMS) to Contacts
99
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Tap and then [Settings].
･
You can set the following options.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Tap a thread.
3
Touch and hold a message (SMS)
you want to delete.
4
Tap [Delete message]
u
[Yes].
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Touch and hold a thread you want
to delete.
3
Tap [Delete conversation]
u
[Yes].
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Messaging].
2
Tap and tap [Delete several].
3
Tap [Mark all]
u
[Delete].
･
After tapping [Mark all], you can tap
individual thread to unmark. Tap
[Unmark all] to unmark all of the
threads.
Setting message (SMS)
Delivery report
If you mark, a message (SMS) you
sent is marked each time a recipient
receives the message (SMS).
Notifications
Mark if you want to be notified by
the status bar when a new message
(SMS) arrives.
Notification
tone
Set if you want to be notified by
selected notification tone when a
new message arrives.
Notification
vibration
Set if you want to receive a
notification by vibration when a
new message arrives.
Notification
light
Mark to set to notify of reception by
notification LED when notification
setting is made.
SIM messages
Manage messages (SMS) saved to
docomo mini UIM card.
Message
template
settings
Register phrase that can be inserted
when writing a text.
Push settings
Set a message (SMS) sent from the
provider.
Deleting a message (SMS)
Deleting a thread
Deleting all threads
100
Mail/Web browser
You can create an email account provided by
mopera U mail, a POP3 or IMAP compatible
email account provided by general ISP
(provider), or an Exchange ActiveSync
account to send or receive email.
Email setup wizard appears. Set according
the onscreen instructions. Multiple email
accounts can be set.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Enter your email address and
password.
3
Tap [Next].
･
To make the email account settings
manually, tap [Manual setup] and
follow the onscreen instructions.
4
Select required items for account
setting and tap [Next].
･
If a screen for selecting type of account
appears, tap an email account type and
follow the onscreen instructions to set.
5
Enter account name and displayed
name for email, and tap [Next].
･
Inbox for set email account appears.
･
If you set an Exchange ActiveSync
account, a name displayed for email
cannot be set. Set up from "Your name"
(P.103) on email account settings after
email initial settings is complete.
❖
Information
･
If you need to make the settings manually, contact
your email service provider or system administrator
for the correct email account settings.
･
If you set an Exchange ActiveSync account as email
account, and if server manager sets Remote wipe,
the data saved in the terminal may be deleted. Data
stored in microSD card is not deleted.
･
Emails are not displayed in Timescape.
Email
Making initial setting for Email
101
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap (Compose).
3
Enter the email address of
recipient.
･
Tap to display the contacts list
screen to select from registered
contacts. When you enter a name or
email address in the box at the top of
the screen, a list of contacts beginning
with the entered numbers or letters
appears.
･
To Cc or Bcc, tap and tap [Show Cc/
Bcc].
･
To enter multiple email addresses
directly, separate with a comma (,) and
then enter the next email address.
4
Enter a subject.
5
Enter a message.
6
To attach a file, tap .
･
Attach a file in the following operations.
･
Image/video/music file up to 5MB can
be attached in Email.
7
Tap (Send).
❖
Information
･
When you want to save a mail as draft while creating
a mail, enter any of recipient, subject or message or
attach a file. If you do not enter or attach anything, a
mail is not saved as draft. (When only automatic
signature is attached, a mail is not saved as draft
either.)
･
While creating a mail, tap and tap [Save draft] to
save a mail as draft. Also, when you move to the
other screen while creating an email, the email is
automatically saved as draft.
･
In sent/received emails, a communication data is also
included other than text and image displayed on the
screen and charges will apply to the data.
･
Email is handled as an email from a PC. You cannot
send or receive email if "Reject emails from PCs" is set
on a recipient terminal.
Creating and sending email
Add
picture
Select a file from the saved image file list.
Take photo
Start the camera to take a photo and
attach it.
Add video
Select a file from the saved video file list.
Record
video
Start the camera to record a video and
attach it.
Add sound WALKMAN
: Select a saved music file.
Sound Recorder
: Record a voice
message and attach it.
102
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
･
If you have already set an email
account, tap [Inbox] to select an email
account to receive.
2
On the Inbox, tap and tap
[Refresh].
3
Tap an email.
❖
Information
･
The sender name of a received email is the name set
on sender's terminal.
･
If you set "Email notifications" in Account settings
(P.103) and set "Inbox check frequency" to an item
other than "Manual", appears in the status bar
when you receive a new email. Drag the status bar
downwards to read the received email.
･
If you set "Inbox check frequency" in Account
settings (P.103) to an item other than "Manual", and if
you are using the pay-as-you-go data
communication, you may be charged every time you
check your email.
･
If you tap the address of a received email, you can
register it in Phonebook. If it has been already
registered, you can display the details of the entry.
･
Tap (gray) to turn (yellow) on the email list
screen or email message screen to add the marked
email to "Starred" folder on the email screen.
"Starred" folder is displayed when you tap [Inbox]
and [Show all folders]. From "Starred" folder, you can
quickly access to the mail you have marked.
If is not displayed on the email message screen,
tap to display.
･
When phone memory becomes low, a message
indicating low memory space appears and receiving
emails is not available. Delete saved emails etc. to
make available memory space.
Changing Inbox view
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap and
[Settings]
u
[General]
u
[Preview
pane].
･
If you mark [Landscape], email message
preview can be displayed in landscape
view.
❖
Information
･
If you have two or more accounts, change made in
any of the accounts applies to all accounts.
Receiving and reading email
103
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap email and .
･
The attached file list is displayed.
3
Tap [Save] of file you want to save.
･
When attached file is not loaded, tap
[Load].
･
Tap [View] to view the attached file.
❖
Information
･
The attached file is saved on the internal storage.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap email and .
3
Tap any of [Reply]/[Reply all]/
[Forward].
4
Enter a message and tap .
･
When you select [Forward], enter an
email address to forward.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, touch and hold an email you want to
reply/forward and tap [Reply]/[Reply all]/[Forward] to
replay or forward.
･
When you reply or forward an email, the original
message contents for replying or forwarding is
quoted. To delete the quoted message text, unmark
"Include original text".
･
When you forward an email, the attachment file of
the original message is quoted. To cancel quoting
attached file, tap .
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap an email delete.
3
Tap
u
[Yes].
❖
Information
･
Touch and hold an email you want to delete and tap
[Delete]
u
[Yes] to delete.
･
To delete several emails at the same time, operate as
follows.
In Inbox, tap and [Delete]
u
Mark checkboxes on
the emails you want to delete
u
Tap [Delete]
u
[Yes].
Saving attachment file of email
Replying/forwarding email
Deleting email
104
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap and [Settings].
3
Tap an Email account you want to
change the settings.
･
You can set the following options.
･
The items vary depending on the
account type.
❖
Information
･
You can also set "Out of office", "Days to sync", "Sync
contacts", and "Sync calendar" for an Exchange
ActiveSync account. "Outgoing settings" cannot be
set.
･
If you set "Inbox check frequency" to other than
"Manual", and if you are using the pay-as-you-go data
communication, you may be charged every time you
check your email.
･
If you tap [General] in Step 2, you can change whole
"Email" application settings.
Changing Email account
settings
Account name
Change account name.
Your name
Change your name (sender name).
Signature
Change your signature.
Quick reply
Register phrase that can be inserted
when creating an email.
Default
account
Set to the default account to send
email, if you set two or more email
accounts.
Inbox check
frequency
Set whether to check new messages
automatically and intervals of
automatic check.
Auto download
attachments
Set whether to download attached
file automatically when connecting
via Wi-Fi.
Email
notifications
Set whether to show email arrival
notification in the status bar.
Select ringtone
Set ringtone when receiving an
email.
Vibrate
Set whether to vibrate when
receiving an email.
Notification
light
Set whether to notify email
reception by notification LED.
Incoming
settings
Set mail server for receiving.
Outgoing
settings
Set mail server for sending.
Delete account
Delete Email account.
105
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap and [Settings]
u
[ADD
ACCOUNT].
3
Enter your email address and
password.
･
If required, mark [Send email from this
account by default.] checkbox.
4
Tap [Next].
･
To make the email account settings
manually, tap [Manual setup] and
follow the onscreen instructions.
5
Enter required items for account
settings and tap [Next].
･
If a screen for selecting type of account
appears, tap an email account type and
follow the onscreen instructions to set.
6
Enter account name and displayed
name for email, and tap [Next].
･
Inbox for set email account appears.
･
If you set an Exchange ActiveSync
account, a name displayed for email
cannot be set. Set up from "Your name"
(P.103) on email account settings after
email initial settings is complete.
❖
Information
･
If you need to make the settings manually, contact
your email service provider or system administrator
for the correct email account settings.
･
If you set an Exchange ActiveSync account as email
account, and if server manager sets Remote wipe,
the data saved in the terminal may be deleted. Data
stored in microSD card is not deleted.
･
Tap [Inbox] to display a list of set accounts. Tap
[Combined view] to display combined Inbox for all
accounts.
･
Emails are not displayed in Timescape.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
2
Tap and [Settings]
u
Tap an
account to delete.
3
Tap [Delete account]
u
[OK].
Setting another Email account
Deleting Email account
106
Mail/Web browser
mopera U users (for the setting, see "Setting
mopera U" (P.124)) can use mopera U Mail.
In mopera U Mail, POP mail and IMAP mail are
available. The mail box supports 50MB. Also,
the Web mail system is available.
■
POP mail
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
and then tap [Email].
･
If you already set an Email account, tap
and [Settings]
u
[ADD ACCOUNT].
2
Enter mopera U mail address and
mopera U password, then tap
[Manual setup]/[Next].
･
If you tap [Next], it changes
automatically to POP3 account. Go to
Step 4.
3
Tap [POP3] from the type of the
mail account.
4
Check that you have entered [User
name] and [Password] for mopera
U correctly, and [mail.mopera.net]
for the POP3 server.
･
If you tap [Next] in Step 2,
"mail.mopera.net" is entered in the
SMTP server field.
5
Select the security type.
･
When you do not set security, select
[None].
6
Confirm the entry, then tap [Next].
7
Enter [mail.mopera.net] for the
SMTP server and confirm the entry
of [User name] and [Password] for
mopera U.
･
If you tap [Next] in Step 2, you need to
mark [Require sign–in] to check entered
[User name], [Password] for mopera U.
･
If you tap [Next] in Step 2,
"mail.mopera.net" is entered in the
SMTP server field. Set "587" in the Port
field.
8
Tap [Next].
9
On the account setting screen, set
frequency of checking emails etc.
and tap [Next].
10
On the account setting screen,
enter a display name for sending
mail and tap [Next].
･
The mailer is displayed and the set mail
account is available.
❖
Information
･
When [Require sign-in.] is unmarked on the SMTP
server setting screen, sending mails is not available.
Mark [Require sign-in.].
Using mopera U Mail
107
Mail/Web browser
If you have a Google account, you can send/
receive emails by using Gmail on your
terminal. If you have no Google account, see
"Setting Google account" (P.134).
❖
Information
･
Gmail messages are not displayed in Timescape.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Gmail].
2
On the Inbox tray, tap .
･
Synchronizing "Gmail" application in
the terminal with your Gmail account
starts, and the Inbox is refreshed.
❖
Information
･
For details of Gmail, from the Gmail screen, tap
and then [Help] to refer to the Help with the Browser.
You can use Google Talk instant messaging to
chat with friends. To use Google Talk, you
need to make settings of your Google
account. For details, refer to "Setting Google
account" (P.134).
Signing in Google Talk
Signing in is unnecessary if you have already
set a Google account.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Talk].
2
Tap [Existing] and enter user name
and password.
3
Tap [Sign in].
･
After this step, follow the onscreen
instructions.
❖
Information
･
For details of Google Talk, from the Google Talk
screen, tap and then [Help] to refer to the Help
with the Browser.
Gmail
Refreshing Gmail
Google Talk
Sign in and online chat
108
Mail/Web browser
It is a service with which you can receive
earthquake early warning, etc. delivered by
the Meteorological Agency.
･
Area Mail is a free service for which
subscription is not required.
･
Area Mail cannot be received in the following
case.
-During a voice call
- Out of service area
- While power is off
- During International roaming
- During Airplane mode
- While updating software
- When a SIM other than by DOCOMO is
inserted
- While sending/receiving a message (SMS)
･
Area Mail may not be received when
tethering is set or during packet
communications.
･
Area Mail that could not be received cannot
be received later.
A notification content screen appears and
you are notified by buzzer sound/dedicated
ringtone and vibration.
1
Receive Area Mails automatically.
2
A dedicated ring tone sounds and
notification LED flashes when an
Area Mail is received.
･
Ringtone and ringtone volume cannot
be changed.
･
The notification LED blinks only when
backlight is off.
3
A message body of Area Mail
appears automatically.
View received Area Mail later
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Area Mail].
2
Select an Area Mail from the Area
Mail list.
･
You can view message of Area Mail.
Early Warning "Area Mail"
Receiving Early Warning "Area
Mail"
109
Mail/Web browser
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Area Mail].
2
Tap and then [Settings].
❖
Information
･
Area Mail cannot be set when docomo mini UIM card
is not inserted.
1
From the Home screen, tap .
1
Tap the address entry field on the
top of the web page in the Browser
screen.
･
If web page address entry field is not
displayed, flick down the screen to
display.
2
Enter the web page address or
keyword to be searched for.
･
As you enter an address or characters,
retrieved web pages list appears.
3
Tap the displayed candidates list
or .
･
You can move the web page.
❖
Information
･
You can tap to enter search words by voice and
search a web page.
Going back to the previous page
1
Tap
x
.
Setting Early Warning "Area
Mail"
Receive
setting
Set whether to receive Area Mails.
Beep tone
Set sounding time for Area Mail
reception and whether to sound a
dedicated ringtone even in silent
mode.
Check screen
image and
beep tone
Check the ringtone and screen for
reception of earthquake early warning,
tsunami warning or disaster/
evacuation information.
Other
settings
Set receiving/deleting Area Mail.
Web browser
Opening Browser
Moving to a web page
110
Mail/Web browser
1
Tap
y
.
Adding a new tab
Open multiple tabs and view website.
1
While viewing a web page, tap
and tap .
･
A new tab opens in the default home
page.
Switching tabs
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
then tap a tab you want to display.
Closing a tab
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
then tap of a tab to close.
Zooming in/out a web page
To zoom in/out a webpage, perform any of
the following operations.
･
Double-tap at the point you want to zoom in/
out.
･
Pinch-out at the point you want to zoom in or
pinch-in at the point you want to zoom out.
❖
Information
･
Web pages created to fit to the screen cannot be
zoomed in/out.
Searching text in a web page
1
While viewing a web page, tap
and tap [Find on page].
･
The search bar appears in the upper
part of the screen.
2
Enter the search item.
･
When you enter characters, matching
characters are emphasized.
3
Tap to close the search bar.
Copying text in a web page
1
While viewing a web page, touch
and hold text you want to copy.
･
For link set text, touch and hold it and
then tap [Select text].
2
Drag or to select a range of
text to copy.
･
Selected text is highlighted in blue.
3
Tap .
･
After copying text is completed, a
message "Text copied to clipboard."
appears.
Exiting Browser
Displaying web page
Back to the previous matched item
Go to next matched item
111
Mail/Web browser
4
Touch and hold the entry field on
the pasting location, and tap
[PASTE].
❖
Information
･
On some web pages, selecting characters may not
be available.
Adjusting Browser settings
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
[Settings] to select an item for the
Browser.
Setting a home page
Set home page for opening new tab.
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
then [Settings]
u
[General]
u
[Set
homepage] and select a home
page setting option.
Operating links in web pages
1
Open the web page you want to
operate the links.
2
Tap a link.
･
The links get enclosed in a blue box
when selected.
･
If you touch and hold a link, the menus,
"Open", "Open in new tab", "Save link",
"Copy link URL" and "Select text" appear.
When you touch and hold an image or
a link that contains image, "Save image",
"View image" and "Set as wallpaper"
also appear.
･
Browser recognizes some phone
numbers that allow you to call the
phone number. Tap the phone number
to call.
･
When you download a file by "Save link"
from websites which require Basic
authentication or SSL session, the
downloading may be failed.
Operating links
112
Mail/Web browser
You can check history and store many
bookmarks on the terminal.
Bookmarking a web page
1
On the Browser screen, display the
web page you want to bookmark.
2
Tap and [Save to bookmarks].
3
Set label etc. and tap [OK].
･
You can set the following options.
Opening a bookmark
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
[Bookmarks].
2
Tap the bookmark you want to
open.
･
Touch and hold a bookmark to edit or
delete it.
Checking browsing history
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
tap [Bookmarks]
u
[History] tab.
2
Tap the time you browsed the web
page, such as [Today], [Yesterday],
etc.
･
To open the web page, tap an item.
･
To check your most visited web pages,
tap [Most visited].
❖
Information
･
On the Browser screen, touch and hold
x
to
check the history.
Clearing history
1
On the Browser screen, tap and
tap [Bookmarks]
u
[History] tab.
2
Tap a time when you viewed, touch
and hold a history you want to
delete, then tap [Remove from
history].
❖
Information
･
To clear temporary internet files such as cache, on
the Browser screen, tap and [Settings], then from
the "Privacy & security", set each item.
Managing bookmarks and
history
Label
Set a name displayed to the bookmark.
Address
Set URL saved to the bookmark.
Account
When you set Google account etc., you
can select the account as a bookmark
saving location.
Add to
Add a shortcut of the bookmark on the
Home screen or create a folder.
113
Settings
Settings
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
■
Setting menu
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap and
u
[Settings], or open the notification panel and
tap to display the Settings screen.
You can make settings related to networks
such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth function.
Using the Wi-Fi function, you can connect to
an access point for your home, company
network or public wireless LAN services to
use mail and Internet.
･
Even when Wi-Fi is on, packet communication
is available. However, while you connect Wi-Fi
network, Wi-Fi comes first.
･
When a Wi-Fi network is disconnected,
connection is automatically switched to a "LTE
(preferred)/WCDMA/GSM" network. Note that
packet communication fee applies if network
connection stays switched.
･
Turn the Wi-Fi function to off when you do
not use Wi-Fi to cut battery power
consumption.
Before using Wi-Fi
To use Wi-Fi, turn on Wi-Fi and search
available Wi-Fi network, then connect it.
･
To access the Internet using Wi-Fi, connect to
Wi-Fi network in advance.
❖
Information
･
Make sure to receive enough signal strength for
using Wi-Fi. The signal strength of the Wi-Fi network
varies by the location of the terminal. Moving closer
to the Wi-Fi router might enhance the signal
strength.
Viewing the setting menu
WIRELESS & NETWORKS
P. 1 1 2
DEVICE
P. 1 2 5
PERSONAL
P. 1 3 4
SYSTEM
P. 1 4 6
Wireless & networks
Wi-Fi
P. 1 1 2
Bluetooth
P.117, P.156
Data usage
P. 1 1 7
More... Airplane mode
P. 1 1 8
VPN
P. 1 1 9
Tethering & portable
hotspot
P. 1 2 0
Wi-Fi Direct
P. 1 2 2
Location-based Wi-Fi
P. 1 2 2
Mobile networks
P.122, P.226
Wi-Fi
114
Settings
■
Reception interference caused by
Bluetooth devices
Bluetooth devices and wireless LAN
(IEEE802.11b/g/n) devices use the same
frequency band (2.4GHz). If you use
Bluetooth devices near a wireless LAN
device, reception interference may occur or
the communications speed may lower.
Also, you may hear noise or have a
connection problem. Communication may
be interrupted or sound may be lost while
streaming data, etc. In these cases, do the
following:
･
Keep the terminal and Bluetooth device
to be connected wirelessly 10 or more
meters away from a wireless LAN device.
･
Within 10 meters, turn off the Bluetooth
device to be connected.
■
5GHz device cautions
The following channel numbers and
frequency bands are available in Japan.
･
5GHz wireless LAN device is prohibited to
use outdoor by Law.
Channel number
(Ch)
Frequency band
(MHz)
5.2GHz
band
36 5,180
38 5,190
40 5,200
44 5,220
46 5,230
48 5,240
5.3GHz
band
52 5,260
54 5,270
56 5,280
60 5,300
62 5,310
64 5,320
5.6GHz
band
100 5,500
102 5,510
104 5,520
108 5,540
110 5,550
112 5,560
116 5,580
118 5,590
120 5,600
124 5,620
126 5,630
128 5,640
132 5,660
134 5,670
136 5,680
140 5,700
Channel number
(Ch)
Frequency band
(MHz)
115
Settings
Turning on Wi-Fi
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap of Wi-Fi or drag it to the
right.
❖
Information
･
It may take a few seconds before the Wi-Fi
connection is on.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
･
Available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
The available networks may be open or
secured. This is indicated by or
next to the Wi-Fi network name.
2
Select Wi-Fi network you want to
connect, tap [Connect].
･
If you are trying to connect to a
protected Wi-Fi network, you are asked
to enter the security key for that Wi-Fi
network before you can connect to it.
❖
Information
･
The next time you connect to a Wi-Fi network, the
security key is saved in the terminal.
･
If you enter a wrong password (security key) when
selecting an access point to connect, any of the
following appears.
-Saved, Secured with WEP
- Avoided poor Internet connection
*
- Authentication problem
- Limited connectivity
* It may take 5 minutes or more to display the
message after [Connect] is tapped.
Check a password (security key).
When any of above messages appears even if you
enter a correct password (security key), the correct IP
address may not have been acquired. Check the
signal status and reconnect.
･
To connect Wi-Fi network with WPS compatible
device, on the Settings menu screen (P.112), tap [Wi-
Fi] and select a Wi-Fi network to connect and mark
[Show advanced options]. Set appeared WPS item to
"Push button", tap [Connect] and then push WPS
button on the WPS compatible device.
116
Settings
■
Wi-Fi network status icons on status
bar
The following icons appear according to the
Wi-Fi network connection status.
* Without connected to Wi-Fi network, you need to set
Wi-Fi Network notification to on beforehand. (P.115)
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap the Wi-Fi network that you are
currently connected to.
3
Tap [Forget network].
Wi-Fi network status
When you are connected to a Wi-Fi network
or when there are Wi-Fi networks available in
your vicinity, you can see the status of these
Wi-Fi networks. You can also set the terminal
to notify you when an unsecured Wi-Fi
network is detected.
Setting the Wi-Fi network notification
to ON
1
Confirm Wi-Fi is ON and from the
Settings screen (P.112), tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap and [Advanced].
3
Mark [Network notification]
checkbox.
Scanning for Wi-Fi networks
manually
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap [Scan].
･
Scanning Wi-Fi networks starts.
3
Tap a Wi-Fi network in the list to
connect to it.
Adding a Wi-Fi network manually
You need to turn on the Wi-Fi setting
beforehand. (P.114)
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap [Add network].
3
Enter a network SSID of the Wi-Fi
network you want to add.
Appears when connected to Wi-Fi network.
Appears when communicating via Wi-Fi network.
Appears when connected to Wi-Fi network using
Auto IP function.
Appears when any open network within the
service area is detected.
*
117
Settings
4
Tap [Security] field and tap a
security type of the Wi-Fi network
you want to add.
･
4 options, "None", "WEP", "WPA/WPA2
PSK", or "802.1x EAP", appear.
5
If required, enter security
information for the Wi-Fi network
you want to add.
6
Tap [Save].
Viewing detailed information on a
connected Wi-Fi network
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap the Wi-Fi network that you are
currently connected to.
･
The detailed network information is
displayed.
❖
Information
･
From the Settings screen (P.112), tap [Wi-Fi] and ,
then tap [Advanced] to enable/disable Auto IP
support or check "MAC address" and "IP address".
Wi-Fi sleep policy
By changing Wi-Fi sleep policy, you can
choose to disable the Wi-Fi function in the
terminal when the screen backlight turns off.
You can also set the terminal to always turn
on the Wi-Fi function or to turn it on when
the terminal is charged.
❖
Information
･
When a Wi-Fi network is disconnected, connection is
automatically switched to a LTE/3G/GPRS network.
Adding a Wi-Fi sleep policy
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Wi-Fi].
2
Tap .
3
Tap [Advanced].
4
Tap [Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep].
5
Tap any of [Always]/[Only when
plugged in]/[Never (increases data
usage)].
118
Settings
Connect Bluetooth device wirelessly using
Bluetooth function. For Bluetooth
communication, see "Using Bluetooth
function" (P.156).
Enable/Disable data communication or set
data usage limit.
❖
Information
･
You can check communication volume for each
application. For some applications, the settings can
be displayed.
Turning on data communication
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap of Mobile data or drag
it to the right.
3
Read the note and tap [Yes].
Setting data usage limit
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap [Set mobile data limit] and
read the notes, and then tap [OK].
･
[Set mobile data limit] is marked.
❖
Information
･
Note that data communication will be disabled
when data usage volume reaches to the limit.
･
Change the setting value for data usage limit and the
value for alert by dragging the right end of each bar
in the graph.
Setting Data usage cycle
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap a period set in "Data usage
cycle" or [Change cycle...].
･
When you tap [Change cycle...], select
reset date and tap [Set].
Bluetooth
Data usage
119
Settings
Permitting data roaming
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap and then [Data roaming],
read the notes and then tap [OK].
･
[Data roaming] checkbox is marked.
Restricting background data
You need to set mobile data restriction
beforehand.
（
P. 1 1 7
）
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap and [Restrict background
data], then read the notes and
then tap [OK].
･
[Restrict background data] checkbox is
marked.
Displaying Wi-Fi usage status
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Data usage].
2
Tap and mark [Show Wi-Fi
usage].
･
"Wi-Fi" tab is displayed and tap it to
check Wi-Fi usage condition.
In this mode, the functions of using radio
wave transmissions such as calling, accessing
to the Internet (including sending/receiving
mails), etc. are disabled. It is useful when you
want to operate the terminal with no
interruption of incoming calls or mails.
Turning on Airplane mode
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...].
2
Mark [Airplane mode] checkbox.
･
When you unmark [Airplane mode]
checkbox, the Airplane mode turns off.
❖
Information
･
You can also switch on/off by pressing and holding
p
for over a second and then [Airplane mode] in
the pop-up screen.
･
Even if Airplane mode is on, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
function can be turned on.
Airplane mode
120
Settings
Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a technology
to connect to the information in a protected
local network from another network.
Generally, VPNs are provided to companies,
schools and other facilities. A user can access
to the information in the local network from
outside of the premises.
To set up a VPN access from the terminal, you
need to retrieve the information related to
security from your network administrator. For
details, refer to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/
support/ (in Japanese only).
❖
Information
･
If you set sp-mode as an ISP, you cannot use PPTP.
Adding a VPN
Set the unlock method for the screen lock in
advance. For details, refer to "Setting screen
unlock method" (P.142).
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[VPN].
2
Tap [Add VPN network].
3
When an editing screen is
displayed, follow the instruction of
the network administrator to set
required items of VPN settings.
4
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
Added VPNs can be edited or deleted.
To edit VPNs, touch and hold a VPN you want to
change, then tap [Edit network]. Change the VPN
settings as required and tap [Save].
To delete, touch and hold a VPN you want to delete,
then tap [Delete network].
Connecting to a VPN
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[VPN].
2
Tap a VPN to connect to.
3
If the dialog box appears, enter the
desired authentication
information and tap [Connect].
･
When you are connected to a VPN,
appears in the status bar. When you are
disconnected, the notification
indicating to return to the VPN setting
screen appears, so that you can
reconnect to.
Disconnecting a VPN
1
Open the Notification panel, and
tap the VPN connecting
notification.
2
Tap [Disconnect].
Connecting to a VPN (Virtual
Private Network)
121
Settings
Tethering stands for using mobile devices
such as smartphone as modem to allow USB
compatible devices or wireless LAN devices
to access the Internet.
❖
Information
･
Packet communication charge when using tethering
varies depending on the charging plan you use.
Subscription of packet flat-rate service is highly
recommended.
･
For details on usage charge, etc., refer to
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/ .
･
For details on tethering, from the Settings screen
(P.112), tap [More...]
u
[Tethering & portable
hotspot]
u
[Help] to refer.
Setting USB tethering
Connecting the terminal to a USB compatible
PC with microUSB cable, and using the
terminal as a modem, you can connect the
PC to the Internet.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
Tap [Tethering &
portable hotspot].
2
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable (P.29).
･
When you connect microUSB cable for
the first time, the driver software for the
terminal is installed to a PC. Wait for a
while until installation is completed.
After completion, if a confirmation
screen for installation of PC Companion
software appears, tap [Skip].
3
Tap [USB tethering].
4
Confirm details of the cautions
displayed, tap [OK].
･
[USB tethering] is marked.
❖
Information
･
System requirements (OS) for USB tethering are as
follows.
- Microsoft Windows 7
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows XP
*
-Linux
* For Microsoft Windows XP, installation of PC
Companion is required.
Using tethering function
122
Settings
Setting up a portable Wi-Fi hotspot
You can use the terminal as a Wi-Fi access
point to connect up to 10 wireless LAN
devices to the Internet simultaneously.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Tethering &
portable hotspot].
2
Tap [Configure Wi-Fi hotspot].
3
Enter a network SSID of the Wi-Fi
access point to set.
･
By default, "Xperia XX SO-02E_XXXX" is
set.
4
Tap [Security] field and tap a
security type of Wi-Fi access point
to set.
･
"None", "WPA PSK" and "WPA2 PSK"
appear.
5
Enter security information of the
Wi-Fi access point to set as
required.
6
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
By default, the password is set at random. You can
change the password as desired.
Setting Wi-Fi tethering
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Tethering &
portable hotspot].
2
Tap [Portable Wi-Fi hotspot].
3
Confirm details of the cautions
displayed, tap [OK].
･
[Portable Wi-Fi hotspot] is marked.
❖
Information
･
If USB tethering starts while connecting to Wi-Fi
network, Wi-Fi network is disconnected and
automatically connected when Wi-Fi tethering ends.
Alternatively, when the terminal and DLNA device
are connected via Wi-Fi network, starting/ending Wi-
Fi tethering affects Wi-Fi connection.
･
USB tethering and Wi-Fi tethering can be used at the
same time.
123
Settings
You can connect among the devices
compatible with Wi-Fi Direct via Wi-Fi even
without configuring access point.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Wi-Fi Direct].
･
When the Wi-Fi setting is on, the note
appears. Read the note and tap [OK].
･
[Wi-Fi Direct] is marked.
❖
Information
･
To use the Wi-Fi Direct function, you need an
application compatible with Wi-Fi Direct function.
The function becomes available when you install a
compatible application.
Connect to Wi-Fi within only neighboring
place you registered to reduce the battery
power consumption.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Location-based Wi-
Fi].
2
Tap of Location-based Wi-
Fi or drag it to the right.
･
When Wi-Fi network is not registered,
tap [Set up Wi-Fi] to connect to Wi-Fi.
（
P. 1 1 4
）
An access point for connecting to the
Internet (sp-mode, mopera U) is already
registered. You can add or change it if
necessary.
By default, sp-mode (P.124) is set for the usual
access point.
Checking the access point you use
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Access Point Names].
･
Available access points (APN) appear.
･
It is recommended that you use the
displayed access point without editing.
❖
Information
･
If you have several available connections, a marked
radio button to the right indicates the active network
connection.
Using Wi-Fi Direct function
Using Location-based Wi-Fi
Setting an access point
124
Settings
Setting an access point additionally
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Access Point Names].
2
Tap .
3
Tap [New APN].
4
Tap [Name], enter a name and tap
[OK].
5
Tap [APN] and enter the access
point name and tap [OK].
6
Tap and enter all other
information required by your
network operator.
7
Tap and [Save].
❖
Information
･
Do not change the MCC/MNC. If you change MCC/
MNC to other than the default value (440/10), the
settings do not appear on the APNs screen. When
the MCC/MNC settings do not appear on the APNs
screen, tap to make APN settings with [Reset to
default] or [New APN] again.
･
Note that, when using the prediction conversion by
one-byte alphabet entry mode (English mode) with
mark in [Auto space] (P.55) on Japanese keyboard
settings screen, spaces may be entered automatically
when the prediction option is confirmed. In this case,
delete spaces.
Using block access point change
function
Set to prevent changing access point
automatically.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Mobile networks].
2
Mark [Block access point change]
checkbox.
❖
Information
･
This function is enabled by default. If disabled, access
point is changed automatically and unexpected
charges may apply.
･
Some applications you installed may not be
operated correctly when this function is enabled.
125
Settings
By initializing an access point, the default
state is restored.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Access Point Names].
2
Tap and tap [Reset to default].
sp-mode is ISP for NTT DOCOMO
smartphone. In addition to accessing
Internet, you can use the mail service using
the same address as imode mail
(@docomo.ne.jp), etc. sp-mode is a service
requiring subscription. For details on sp-
mode, refer to NTT DOCOMO website.
mopera U is ISP of NTT DOCOMO's Internet
connection. If you have subscribed to
mopera U, you can use Internet after making
the simple settings. mopera U is a service
requiring subscription.
Setting mopera U
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Access Point Names].
2
Mark [mopera U]/[mopera U
設定
(mopera U settings)] radio button.
･
Return to the Home screen and open
the Browser. You can enjoy the nice
Internet access.
❖
Information
･
"mopera U
設定
(mopera U settings)" is an access
point for setting mopera U. When you use the access
point for setting mopera U, packet communication
charges for setting do not apply. Note that you can
set only the initial setting screen or the change
setting screen. For details on mopera U settings, refer
to mopera U website.
Initializing an access point
sp-mode
mopera U
126
Settings
You can use the network services and search
for available networks. For Call settings, see
"Call settings" (P.84).
Set ringtones, operation sound, vibrator, etc.
Adjusting each sound volume
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound]
u
[Volumes].
･
Adjust the volume of following items.
- Music, video, games, & other media
- Ringtone & notifications
-Alarms
2
Drag the slider left or right to
adjust the level.
･
Drag the slider to the left for volume
down, or to the right for volume up.
3
Tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
Even if alarm volume is set in Volumes, "Alarm
volume" set in "Alarm & clock" (P.216) is given priority.
Adjusting the ringtone volume with
the volume key
1
From the Home screen, press up or
down of
m
.
･
The volume adjustment bar appears,
you can adjust the volume up or down.
❖
Information
･
You can also press
m
or
p
to mute the
ringtone for an incoming call.
Device
Call settings
Sound
xLOUD
™
Set audio playback level
enhancement technology
("xLOUD") to enjoy powerful
sounds with the built-in speaker
when playing WALKMAN, YouTube,
Album, etc.
Volumes
P. 1 2 5
Silent mode
P. 1 2 6
Phone ringtone
P. 1 2 6
Default
notification
P. 1 2 6
Vibrate on ring
P. 1 2 6
Dial pad touch
tones
P. 1 2 6
Touch sounds
P. 1 2 6
Screen lock
sound
Set whether to emit sound for
unlocking the screen lock.
Vibrate on touch
Set whether to vibrate the terminal
for some operations such as
specified software key operation.
127
Settings
Setting Silent mode
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound]
u
[Silent mode].
2
Tap any of [Off]/[Vibrate]/[Mute].
❖
Information
･
You can also set the Silent mode by pressing and
holding
p
for over a second and then tap /
in the pop-up screen. Set Mute (ringtone volume
0) by tapping or set Vibration by tapping .
･
Setting the phone to Silent mode does not mute
sounds for shutter, playback of video or music, alarm,
etc. Note that volume up for "Ringtone &
notifications" in Volumes (P.125) cancels Silent mode.
Setting a ringtone
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound]
u
[Phone ringtone].
2
Select a ringtone and tap [Done].
❖
Information
･
You can set voice file in ".wav", ".m4a" or in other
format which is transferred from Media Go (P.153) or
downloaded from the Internet as a ringtone.
･
To set a ringtone other than the ones stored by
default, tap .
Selecting a notification ringtone
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound]
u
[Default
notification].
2
Select a ringtone and tap [Done].
❖
Information
･
To set a notification other than the ones stored by
default, tap .
Setting vibration when receiving a
call
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound]
u
Mark [Vibrate on
ring].
･
Ringtone sounds and the terminal
vibrates when there is an incoming call.
Setting touch tones to ON
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Sound].
2
Mark [Dial pad touch tones] and
[Touch sounds].
･
If you unmark them, any operation
tones do not sound when you tap.
❖
Information
･
"Dial pad touch tones" is a sound for operations on
the dial pad. "Touch sounds" is a sound for selecting
menu.
128
Settings
･
To set the key sound of software keyboard, select a
type of software keyboard (P.53) to set.
Set brightness, orientation of the screen, etc.
* Setting Mobile BRAVIA Engine improves image
quality when using Xperia
™
application.
Adjusting the screen brightness
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Display]
u
[Brightness].
2
Drag the slider to the right or left.
･
Drag the slider to the left for dimmer
screen, or to the right for brighter
screen.
3
Tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
Mark [Adapt to lighting conditions] to adjust
brightness automatically according to the ambient
brightness with reference to the manually set
brightness.
Adjusting the idle time before the
screen turns off
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Display]
u
[Sleep].
2
Select a time option before the
screen back light turns off.
❖
Information
･
To turn the screen back light off immediately, press
p
.
Display
Mobile BRAVIA
Engine
To view photos or movies
colorfully and beautifully, set
image quality improving
procedure (Mobile BRAVIA
Engine). It adjusts contrast, color
shade, etc.
*
Brightness
P. 1 2 7
Wallpaper
P. 6 3
Auto-rotate screen
P. 3 8
Sleep
P. 1 2 7
Font size
Set font size.
Theme
Set a background for the Home
screen, Settings screen, etc.
Lock screen
settings
P. 1 2 8
129
Settings
Setting information displayed on the
unlock screen
Yon can set information displayed on the
unlock screen (P.31). To display information,
set unlocking method of the screen lock to
"Slide".
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Display]
u
[Lock screen
settings].
■
Displaying notification
Mark [Missed calls]/[New sp-mode mails]/
[New messages]/[New emails]/[Calendar
events].
･
By default, "Missed calls", "New sp-
mode mails" and "New messages" are
marked.
･
When you log in to Facebook and set
"Facebook inside Xperia
™
" (P.136),
"Facebook notifications" checkbox
appears. Mark the checkbox to display a
notification information for new
message of Facebook on the unlock
screen. (Notifications such as "Friend
Requests", "Event Invitation", etc. are not
displayed.)
■
Hiding detailed information on
notification
Mark [Privacy] checkbox.
･
Notification and a number of messages,
calls, etc. are displayed while
information on the other party or
message contents are not displayed.
■
Changing shortcuts of applications
Tap [Application shortcuts]
u
[Add new
shortcut]/[Contacts]/[Messaging]/
[Search] and select the application you
want to change.
･
By default, "Contacts", "Messaging" and
"Search" are set, which can be
customized.
･
Flick right around date and time
displayed on the unlock screen to
display a shortcut for the preset
application, or flick left to display
WALKMAN widget. You can activate the
application or play music without
unlocking screen lock. You cannot
replace the WALKMAN widget.
■
Changing wallpaper
Tap [Wallpaper]
u
[Album]/[Xperia
™
wallpapers].
･
For setting procedure, see Step 2 (P.63)
in "Changing wallpaper".
130
Settings
■
Displaying Machi-chara
Mark [Machi-chara] and tap [OK].
･
Set "Machi-chara" widget on the Home
screen in advance. For setting
procedure, see "Adding a widget to the
Home screen" (P.62).
･
If [Machi-chara] is marked, three
checkboxes or less can be marked for
Notification (P.128).
Check memory volume of the phone
memory, internal storage, microSD card, and
USB storage. And you can delete data in the
internal storage, microSD card and USB
storage and format.
USB storage is an external memory such as a
microSD card connected to the terminal
using commercially available reader/writer
cable.
Storage
PHONE MEMORY
Total space
Check the phone memory for apps,
available space, etc.
INTERNAL STORAGE
Total space
Check memory space for Apps,
Pictures, videos, Audio (music,
ringtones, podcasts, etc.) and
available space.
Clear internal
storage
P. 1 3 0
SD CARD
Total space
Check available memory space etc.
of microSD card.
Unmount SD
card
*
Cancel connection of microSD card
to remove it safely.
Mount SD card
*
Have microSD card recognized.
Erase SD card
P. 1 3 0
USB STORAGE
Total space
Check available memory space of
USB storage.
131
Settings
* Display changes depending on condition of USB
storage or microSD card recognition.
❖
Information
･
Note that when available memory of internal storage
becomes 32KB or less, microSD card cannot be
mounted.
Formatting the internal storage of the
terminal
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Storage].
2
Tap [Clear internal storage]
u
Tap
[Clear internal storage].
･
Enter your screen unlock method as
required.
3
Tap [Erase everything].
❖
Information
･
Formatting the terminal deletes all the data in it.
Formatting microSD card
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Storage].
2
Tap [Erase SD card]
u
[Erase SD
card].
･
Enter your screen unlock method as
required.
3
Tap [Erase everything].
❖
Information
･
Formatting microSD card deletes all the data in it.
Formatting USB storage
Insert external memory such as a microSD
card into commercially available reader/
writer cable and connect the cable to the
terminal in advance.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Storage].
2
Tap [Clear USB storage]
u
[Erase].
･
Enter your screen unlock method as
required.
3
Tap [Erase everything].
❖
Information
･
Formatting USB storage (external memory such as
microSD card) deletes all the data in it.
Unmount USB
storage
*
Cancel connection of USB storage
to remove it safely.
Mount USB
storage
*
Have USB storage recognized.
Clear USB
storage
P. 1 3 0
132
Settings
Increasing the available memory of
the terminal
If the terminal has a small memory, you can
perform the following operations to increase
available memory.
･
In the browser, you can clear all temporary
Internet files and browser history information.
For details, refer to "Clearing history" (P.111).
･
Uninstall programs that you no longer use. For
details, refer to "Deleting installed application"
(P.132).
Display battery usage data, remaining
battery level, available usage time against
the remaining battery level, etc.
Tap to update the information.
Manage and delete installed applications,
display memory usage condition, etc. or
change the settings.
Viewing permitted operation of the
applications in the terminal
You can check functions which are permitted
to access to each application in the progress
of performing, such as network
communication function or location
information function of the terminal.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to view.
3
Flick the screen up to view
permitted operations.
･
If all permitted operations do not
appear, tap [Show all].
Battery
Apps
133
Settings
Shutting down an application
If a pop-up window that indicates the
application does not reply appears, you can
force quit the application.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to force-quite.
3
Tap [Force stop].
4
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[OK].
❖
Information
･
When you do not want to force stop the application,
tap [Cancel] and wait for a reply of the application.
Deleting all data of the application
･
Before deleting all installed application data,
back up contents related to the application
that you want to save including data saved in
the application.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to delete the
data.
3
Tap [Clear data].
4
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[OK].
Deleting installed application
･
Before deleting installed application, back up
contents related to the application that you
want to save including data saved in the
application.
･
Some applications cannot be deleted.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to be deleted.
3
Tap [Uninstall].
4
Tap [OK].
5
When uninstallation is completed,
tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
Some applications pre-installed in the terminal
cannot be uninstalled. For applications which cannot
be uninstalled, disabling is possible (P.133).
･
Applications can be deleted from the Application
screen. For details, refer to "Uninstalling an
application" (P.73).
134
Settings
Disabling application
You can disable some applications which
cannot be uninstalled or services. Disabled
applications are not displayed on the
Application screen and you cannot execute
them, but they are not uninstalled.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap [All].
3
Tap an application to be disabled.
4
Tap [Disable].
5
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[OK].
･
To enable again, tap [Enable].
❖
Information
･
When you disabled an application, some other
applications linked to the disabled application may
not be operated correctly. Enable the disabled
application again to operate them correctly.
Deleting cache of the application
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to delete cache.
3
Tap [Clear cache].
Deleting settings for activating the
application
You can delete settings for activating the
application and restore to the default.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Apps].
2
Tap an application to delete its
settings.
3
Tap [Clear defaults].
Set preferred application in the terminal. You
can also set synchronization function for
Facebook in the terminal, make settings for
USB connection or Wi-Fi connection to a PC
or other devices.
Xperia
™
About
PlayStation
Certified
Display PlayStation Certified.
Connectivity
P. 1 4 9
Facebook
inside Xperia
™
P. 1 3 6
LiveWare
™
manager
Search applications for accessories
such as headset etc. or set operation
when application starts.
Preferred apps
settings
P. 6 0
135
Settings
You can set passwords for applications
provided by docomo or to use the services
supporting AUTO-GPS.
You can manage (add or delete) online
service accounts or synchronize contacts,
messages, etc. saved in online services with
the terminal.
Setting Google account
You can create a Google account on your
terminal and use Google services such as
Gmail, Google Talk, Google Calendar, Google
Play, etc.
You can set multiple Google accounts on the
terminal.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Accounts & sync]
u
[Add
account]
u
[Google].
2
Follow the registration wizard, set
a Google account.
･
If you have no Google account, create
an account.
･
If you have already the Google account,
sign in.
Personal
docomo service
Application
manager
Set to check update for
applications regularly.
Wi-Fi
Set to use docomo service via
Wi-Fi.
docomo apps
password
Set a password for applications
provided by docomo. docomo
apps password is set "0000" by
default.
AUTO-GPS
Set to use the services
supporting AUTO-GPS.
docomo location
information
Set location information
function for imadoco search,
imadocokantan search and
Keitai-Osagashi Service.
docomo Wi-Fi
かんた
ん接続
(docomo Wi-
Fi easy connection)
Set the terminal for using
docomo Wi-Fi or home Wi-Fi.
Send preinstalled
apps usage status
Set to send preinstalled
application usage status.
Open source
licenses
View open source licenses.
Accounts & sync
136
Settings
❖
Information
･
You can use the terminal without creating your
Google account, however the services such as
Google Talk, Gmail, Google Play, etc. are not available.
･
To log in, you need a Google account and a
password.
･
When you sign in, "Backup and restore" screen may
appear. Backup is not available using a Google
account.
･
Tap Google account displayed on the "Accounts &
sync" screen and synchronize each data from the
following items manually.
*1 If a lot of photos are included to Picasa web
album used in Google account or web album
uploaded by Google+, it may consume a lot of
battery power or increase data communication
volume during the synchronization.
*2 To upload photos automatically, select settings
to enable the instant upload on the confirmation
screen when you log in Google+.
･
If you set a Google account and use Google+ in it,
"Sync Google+" appears. Tap it to synchronize and
display instant upload photos in the Album in the
terminal.
･
Make sure to check if the data connection is available
before sign in to the Google account. For checking
the data connection status, see "Status icon" (P.33).
Sync Browser
Synchronize browser settings saved
in Google account such as
bookmarks with web function of the
terminal.
Sync Calendar
Synchronize calendar information
such as schedule, etc., stored in
Google account with Calendar in the
terminal.
Sync Contacts
Synchronize contacts stored in
Gmail with the phonebook stored in
the terminal.
Sync Gmail
Synchronize email logs used in
Gmail account with Gmail on the
terminal.
Sync Google
Photos
*1
Synchronize web album Google
Photos with album in the terminal.
Sync Instant
Upload
*2
Synchronize photos taken with the
camera or saved in a microSD card
with photos of Google+.
Sync Picasa
extension
Synchronize web album of Picasa
used in Gmail account with Album in
the terminal.
137
Settings
Setting Facebook account
When you register or sign in Facebook, you
can display profile information published by
online "Friend" to Phonebook. And you can
display Facebook updates of "Friends" in
Timescape.
❖
Information
･
If you do not have a Facebook account, you can also
create a new account at http://www.facebook.com/.
･
If you download and install client applications for
Twitter or mixi, you can set up accounts and
synchronize contacts information in the same
manner as for Facebook.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Accounts & sync]
u
[Add
account]
u
[Facebook].
･
If you already have a Facebook account
and set account from Phonebook or
Timescape of the terminal, you need
not add a new account.
2
Enter your sign in information.
･
If you have no Facebook account,
register an account.
･
If you have Facebook account, sign in.
❖
Information
･
Set Facebook account to display in the status bar.
Drag the status bar downwards, tap [Facebook inside
Xperia
™
], mark the [Facebook integration] checkbox,
read the displayed note, and then tap [Accept]. Tap
(Facebook inside Xperia
™
) added to the
"Accounts & sync" screen, and tap the following
items to synchronize and display corresponding
data.
Sync Calendar
Synchronize events such as
Friends' birthdays, etc., stored in
Facebook with Calendar in the
terminal.
Sync Contacts
Synchronize profile of Friends
stored in Facebook with the
phonebook stored in the
terminal.
Sync Facebook
photo extension
Synchronize photos registered to
Facebook with the Album in the
terminal.
Sync Friends'
music
Synchronize music that Friends
specified "Like" in Facebook with
WALKMAN in the terminal.
138
Settings
Setting other account
You can use Corporate (Exchange
ActiveSync), docomo account, Email,
Facebook inside Xperia
™
other than Google
account (P.134) or Facebook account (P.136).
■
Corporate (Exchange ActiveSync)
account
･
If you have Corporate (Exchange
ActiveSync) account, from the Settings
menu screen (P.112), tap [Accounts &
sync]
u
[Add account]
u
[Corporate] and
set according to the onscreen instruction.
■
docomo account
･
docomo account helps you to use "
ドコモ
バックアップ
(docomo backup)" service
(P.67) provided by NTT DOCOMO.
docomo account is set by default.
Removing account
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Accounts & sync] and select a
service account you want to
delete.
2
Tap , then tap [Remove
account]
u
[Remove account].
❖
Information
･
The first set Google account is registered as backup
account. When a backup account is removed,
caution appears on the status bar.
･
docomo account cannot be deleted.
Setting Auto-sync
Synchronize information of online service
with the terminal. You can display and edit
information on the terminal or a PC.
You need to set your online service account
(Google account, Facebook account, etc.) in
the terminal to synchronize in advance.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Accounts & sync].
2
Tap or drag it to the right.
3
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[OK].
4
Tap an online service whose
account is set.
139
Settings
5
Tap to mark an item for automatic
synchronization.
･
If the items to be synchronized are
marked and checkboxes are led by ,
synchronization starts. When is not
displayed, tap and tap [Sync now] to
start synchronization.
❖
Note
･
Tap or drag it to the right to permit to
synchronize with your Gmail, calendar, contacts, and
profile information published by "Friends", etc. in
Google account automatically. These
communications may cause you to pay packet
communications charges.
･
If (auto-sync is disabled) is set, you can
synchronize manually. On the settings screen (P.112),
tap [Accounts & sync], tap the service where your
account is set to display the synchronizing items,
then tap items you want to synchronize.
Canceling synchronization
1
Tap during a synchronization.
2
Tap [Cancel sync].
Set whether to permit the location
information service.
Set options related to security.
Location services
Google's location
service
P. 2 0 9
GPS satellites
P. 2 0 9
Location &
Google search
Set whether to permit Google to
use location information using
result etc. of Google search.
Security
Screen lock
P. 1 4 2
Owner info
Set text to be displayed on the
unlock screen.
Encrypt phone
Set to require entering a
security code or password to
decode each time you turn on
the power.
Set up SIM card lock
P. 1 4 1
Make passwords
visible
Set whether to show the input
character before "
・
" appears
on the password entry screen.
Device
administrators
Set whether to enable device
administrator. "Omakase Lock"
is enabled by default
*1
Unknown sources
P. 1 4 4
Trusted credentials
Allow applications to access
secure certificates and other
credentials.
*2
140
Settings
*1 To use Omakase Lock, enable "Omakase Lock".
*2 Set the password to the credential storage in
advance.
*3 Save certificates and credential information in the
credential storage.
Protecting docomo mini UIM card
Some functions provided for convenient use
of the terminal require the security code to
use them. Besides the security code for
locking the terminal, the network security
code necessary for the network services etc.
are available. Make use of the terminal using
an appropriate security code according to
the purpose.
■
Notes on the security codes
･
Avoid using a number that is easy to
guess, such as "birth date", "part of your
phone number", "street address number
or room number", "1111", and "1234".
Make sure to make a note of the security
code you set lest you should forget it.
･
Be very careful not to let others know your
security code. If your security code is
known by anyone else, DOCOMO shall
have no liability for any loss due to any
unauthorized use of it.
･
If you forget your security codes, you must
bring your official identification (such as
drivers license), the terminal, and docomo
mini UIM card with you to the nearest
docomo Shop. For details, contact the
"General Inquiries" on the last page of this
manual.
Install from internal
storage
Install encrypted certificates
from internal storage.
Clear credentials
Clear all certificates or
credential information from the
credential storage
*3
.
141
Settings
･
The PUK code is written on the
subscription form (copy for customer)
handed at the subscription in the
docomo Shop. If you subscribed other
than docomo Shop, you must bring your
official identification (such as drivers
license), the docomo mini UIM card with
you to the nearest docomo Shop or
contact the "General Inquiries" on the last
page of this manual.
Network security code
The network security code is a 4-digit
number necessary for identification or using
the docomo Network Services at reception of
your request in docomo Shop or at docomo
Information Center. It can be set any number
at the subscription and also changed later by
yourself.
You can change your network security code
to new one using a PC if you have "docomo
ID"/"Password" for "My docomo", the General
support site for PC.
Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap
[dmenu] and [
お客様サポートへ
(To Customer
Support)]
u
[
各種お申込・お手続き
(Subscription/Procedure)] to change the
security code yourself.
* For information on "My docomo" and "
お客様
サポートへ
(To Customer Support)", see the
previous page of the last page of this manual.
PIN code
You can set security code which named PIN
code to docomo mini UIM card. It is set
"0000" at the subscription. They can be
changed by yourself.
PIN code is a 4- to 8-digit number (code) that
must be entered for user confirmation to
prevent unauthorized use by a third party
every time you insert the docomo mini UIM
card into the terminal or when the terminal is
powered on. Entering the PIN code enables
making/receiving calls and terminal
operation.
･
If you use a newly purchased terminal with
docomo mini UIM card you have been using
inserted, use the PIN code set on the former
terminal. If you did not change the setting, the
code is "0000".
･
If you enter a wrong PIN code 3 times
consecutively, the PIN code is locked and
cannot be used anymore. In this case, unlock
with "PUK". (P.141)
142
Settings
Personal Unblocking Key (PUK code)
The PUK code is an 8-digit number for
canceling the locked PIN code. The PUK code
cannot be changed by yourself.
･
If you failed to enter PUK code 10 times
consecutively, the docomo mini UIM card is
locked. Please contact a docomo Shop.
Enabling the docomo mini UIM card
PIN
By setting PIN (security code) and entering
PIN code when powered on, you can protect
the docomo mini UIM card from improper
use.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security]
u
[Set up SIM card
lock]
u
[Lock SIM card].
2
Enter the PIN code of the docomo
mini UIM card and tap [OK].
･
[Lock SIM card] is marked.
Entering the PIN code when powered
on
1
On the PIN code entry screen,
enter the PIN code of the docomo
mini UIM card.
2
Tap [OK].
Changing the PIN code
･
You can change the PIN code only when the
PIN of docomo mini UIM card is enabled.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security]
u
[Set up SIM card
lock]
u
[Change SIM PIN].
2
Enter the current PIN code of the
docomo mini UIM card and tap
[OK].
3
Enter the new PIN code of the
docomo mini UIM card and tap
[OK].
4
Enter the new PIN code of the
docomo mini UIM card again and
tap [OK].
143
Settings
Unblocking the locked docomo mini
UIM card
1
On the PUK code entry screen,
enter the PUK code of the docomo
mini UIM card.
2
Tap [New SIM PIN] field and enter
new PIN code of docomo mini UIM
card, then tap [OK].
3
Enter the new PIN code of the
docomo mini UIM card again and
tap [OK].
Screen lock
You can secure your data by requiring a
screen unlock pattern every time the
terminal is turned on or every time it is
activated from sleep mode.
There are 5 types of screen lock settings:
"Slide", "Face Unlock", "Pattern", "PIN" and
"Password". (P.142)
Setting screen unlock method
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security]
u
[Screen lock].
2
Tap [Slide]/[Face Unlock]/
[Pattern]/[PIN]/[Password].
･
When you select [Face Unlock] follow
the onscreen instructions to set face
authentication. For Screen lock when
the Face Unlock cannot be unlocked,
select pattern or PIN to enter.
･
When you select [Pattern], follow the
onscreen instructions to enter unlock
pattern.
Set security question and answer in case
you forget the pattern.
･
When you select [PIN], follow the
onscreen instructions to enter 4 or
more numbers. This "PIN" code is
different from a PIN code to be set to
docomo mini UIM card (P.140).
･
When you select [Password], follow the
onscreen instructions to enter 4 or
more characters including alphabets.
144
Settings
Changing screen unlock method
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security]
u
[Screen lock].
･
Enter the set unlock pattern/PIN/
password.
･
If you should fail 5 times when you
enter the unlock pattern, wait 30
seconds and then try again.
2
Tap [Slide]/[Face Unlock]/
[Pattern]/[PIN]/[Password].
･
Select items you want to change into.
For setting procedure, see Step 2 (P.142)
of "Setting screen unlock method".
Locking the screen
Once screen unlock method (P.142) is set, the
screen is locked when the sleep mode is set
or
p
is pressed.
Unlocking the screen lock
1
Press
p
to turn the backlight
on.
2
Enter unlock screen method.
･
Enter the set Slide/Face unlock/unlock
pattern/PIN/password.
If you forget how to unlock
■
If you set "Pattern"
"Incorrect pattern" appears when you enter
incorrect unlock pattern 5 times
consecutively.
･
Tap [Next], and answer the security
question that you set for the unlock
pattern setting, then tap [Unlock] to
unlock the screen lock.
･
If you set Google account, on the
"Incorrect pattern" screen, tap [Next] to
display "Answer question" and "Enter
Google account details".
- Mark [Answer question] and tap [Next],
and answer the question that you set for
the unlock pattern, then tap [Unlock] to
unlock the screen lock.
- Mark [Enter Google account details], tap
[Next], and enter Google account and
password, then tap [Sign in] to unlock
the screen lock.
･
When setting new unlock pattern after
unlocking screen lock, "Screen unlocked"
appears. Tap [Yes] to reset unlock pattern.
❖
Information
･
Tap [Try again] to retry entering pattern in 30
seconds.
･
Alternatively, tap [Try again] and [Forgot pattern?] to
display answering question screen that you set the
unlock pattern.
145
Settings
･
You can set multiple Google accounts. To unlock the
screen with Google account and password, enter
one of those accounts.
■
If you set "PIN"/"Password"
Please contact a docomo Shop.
Canceling screen lock
You can cancel screen lock pattern after you
set.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security]
u
[Screen lock].
･
Enter the set unlock pattern/PIN/
password.
2
Tap [None].
Permitting downloading unknown
source's application
Before you can download unknown source's
applications, set the terminal to enable
downloading.
Applications you download may be of
unknown origin. To protect your terminal
and personal data, only download
applications from trusted sources such as the
Google Play etc.
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Security].
2
Tap [Unknown sources].
3
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[OK].
･
[Unknown sources] checkbox is
marked.
146
Settings
You can select language and input method.
Changing phone language
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Language &
input]
u
[Language].
2
Select a language and tap [Done].
･
When you select Japanese, "
完了
(Done)" is displayed, but its display
varies by the language you selected.
❖
Information
･
If you choose the wrong language and cannot read
the menu texts, go to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/
so-02e/faq.html for help (in Japanese only).
Setting Voice Search
Text-to-speech settings
* Japanese is not supported.
Language & input
Language
P. 1 4 5
Spelling correction
Set spelling correction.
Personal dictionary
Register words.
Default
Set input method.
Google voice typing
P. 5 3
Shabette-Key-Nyuryoku
Xperia
™
Chinese
keyboard
Xperia
™
Japanese
keyboard
Xperia
™
keyboard
Voice Search
P. 1 4 5
Text-to-speech output
P. 1 4 5
Pointer speed
Set pointer speed of
mouse etc.
Language
Select language used for Google
voice search.
SafeSearch
Set filter explicit.
Block
offensive
words
Set whether to display recognized
offensive voice results.
Google Text-
to-speech
Engine
*
Set language for text-to speech and
audio synthesis engine to read out
text.
Pico TTS
*
Make settings for installed voice
synthesis engine.
Speech rate
Set speed at reading out text.
Listen to an
example
Playback sample of audio synthesis.
147
Settings
Restore the terminal to default.
Resetting the terminal
Resetting the terminal deletes all data,
including downloaded applications and
accounts, and resets the terminal back to the
initial (default) state. Make sure to back up
important data you have on the terminal
before you reset the terminal.
For the initial settings, see "Initial settings
(Setup guide)" (P.31).
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Backup & reset]
u
[Factory
data reset]
u
[Reset phone].
･
Mark [Erase internal storage] checkbox
to delete all contents (music, photos,
videos, etc.) on the internal storage.
･
Enter your screen unlock method as
required.
2
Tap [Erase everything].
･
The terminal restarts automatically.
❖
Information
･
If you reset the terminal, license information for the
DRM protected content may be erased making the
content unable to be played.
･
While restarting or resetting the terminal, just wait. If
you remove the battery pack while restarting or
resetting the terminal, it may cause malfunction.
You can change the date and time in the
terminal.
To set date/time or time zone manually,
unmark [Automatic date & time] or
[Automatic time zone] to disable network-
provided time/time zone in advance.
Backup & reset
System
Date & time
Automatic date &
time
Adjust date and time
automatically by using
network-provided information.
Automatic time zone
Adjust time zone
automatically by using
network-provided information.
Set date
P. 1 4 7
Set time
P. 1 4 7
Select time zone
P. 1 4 7
Use 24-hour format
P. 1 4 7
Select date format
P. 1 4 7
148
Settings
❖
Information
･
Correction of the time differences may not be
performed correctly depending on the overseas
telecommunication carrier. In that case, set time
zone manually (P.147).
Setting the date
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Date & time]
u
[Set date].
2
Drag number to adjust date.
3
Tap [Set].
Setting the time
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Date & time]
u
[Set time].
2
Drag number to adjust hour and
minute.
･
When you unmark [Use 24-hour
format], you can change [AM]/[PM].
3
Tap [Set].
Setting the time zone
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Date & time]
u
[Select time
zone].
2
Select time zone you want to set.
Setting the time format
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Date & time] and mark/
unmark [Use 24-hour format]
checkbox.
･
Mark the checkbox to shift to 24-hour
format, and unmark to shift to 12-hour
format.
Setting the date format
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Date & time]
u
[Select date
format].
2
Select date format you want to set.
149
Settings
You can set user support service which
sounds or vibrates according to users
operation and call end operation.
Put the terminal into debug mode when
connecting USB or set the screen backlight to
ON while charging.
Keeping the screen backlight ON
while charging
1
From the Settings screen (P.112),
tap [Developer options].
2
Mark [Stay awake] checkbox.
You can check your own phone number,
signal level, legal information, etc.
Accessibility
TalkBack
Set user support service
(TalkBack).
Large text
Enlarge text size.
Power button ends call
Set to end a call by
pressing
p
.
Auto-rotate screen
P. 3 8
Speak passwords
Output password by voice
sound.
Touch & hold delay
Set response time for
operation of touching and
holding the screen.
Install web scripts
Set whether to install
script from Google.
Developer options
About phone
Software update
P. 2 4 0
Status
Check your own phone number,
signal level, battery level, etc.
Legal information
Check license agreement, terms
of use, etc.
Model number
Check version and number.
Android version
Baseband version
Kernel version
Build number
150
File management
File management
Files in the terminal should be operated on
the file handling application. For example, to
delete files saved in a microSD card or
internal storage, use the deletion function of
each application.
With "Share" function of each application,
you can exchange files sending to/receiving
from other compatible devices via infrared
communication, Bluetooth or by email file
attachment.
In addition, with the terminal connected to a
PC, you can move to the PC or delete files in
the internal storage or a mounted microSD
card. If you install PC Companion and use
Media Go, you can manage files between a
PC and the terminal mutually.
With "Sync Zone" of PC Companion, you can
synchronize contacts in the terminal and
calendar with Outlook, etc. of a PC.
You can transfer and move images, music
data and some other data. Sharing some data
may not be permitted due to copyright.
By connecting the terminal and a PC with the
supplied microUSB cable, you can exchange
data between the terminal and the PC.
Connecting the terminal and a PC
using a microUSB cable
1
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable (P.29).
･
When you connect microUSB cable for
the first time, the driver software for the
terminal is installed to a PC. Wait for a
while until installation is completed. A
confirmation screen for installation of
PC Companion software appears when
the driver software installation is
completed.
･
The terminal is connected by "Media
transfer mode (MTP)" which is set by
default. Follow onscreen instructions
on a PC to access "Internal Storage/SD
Card" of the terminal.
Handling a file Transferring and moving
data
Using microUSB cable
151
File management
2
Tap [Skip].
❖
Information
･
Window that appears when connecting to a PC may
vary depending on the operating system (OS) of a
PC.
･
From the Home screen, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[Xperia
™
]
u
[Connectivity] to check
connection mode and change the settings as
follows.
･
Connecting with "Mass storage mode (MSC)" also
accesses microSD card as a removal disk. microSD
card cannot be accessed from the terminal and
functions using microSD card may become
unavailable in Camera, Album, etc. while connecting
to a PC.
･
If you install PC Companion by tapping [Install] in
Step 2, you can use the following applications on a
PC for managing media files, creating backup files,
etc. when connecting the terminal and the PC. For
details, check on the PC Companion screen after
installation.
･
When the terminal is connected to a PC, charging
starts automatically. For details, see "Charging with a
PC" (P.29).
Install PC
Companion
Display PC Companion installation
wizard when connected to a PC.
USB
connection
mode
USB connection mode when
connecting to a PC can be selected
between "Media transfer mode (MTP)"
and "Mass storage mode (MSC)".
TRUSTED
DEVICES
Connect the terminal and a host
device in a pair via Wi-Fi network.
(P.152)
Support Zone
Update software of the terminal
connecting to a PC. (P.242)
Contacts Setup
Copy the contacts data of the
mobile phone previously used to the
terminal.
Media Go
P.153
Sync Zone
Synchronize calendar and contacts
between the terminal and Outlook
etc.
Back up and
restore
Back up the terminal data or move
the data to another terminal.
File Manager
Check file type, update time,
location, etc. on the terminal.
152
File management
Disconnecting the microUSB cable
safely
･
Do not disconnect the microUSB cable during
data transferring. Data may be damaged.
･
If you connect the terminal in the Media
transfer mode (MTP), make sure that data
transfer is not in progress and just disconnect
the microUSB cable.
■
Mass storage mode (MSC)
1
Drag the status bar downwards.
2
Tap [SD card connected].
･
"SD card disconnected" appears in the
status bar.
3
Disconnect the microUSB cable.
Dragging and dropping data on the
terminal and a PC
■
Media transfer mode (MTP)
1
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable.
･
"Int.storage/SD card connected"
appears in the status bar.
2
Drag and drop selected data
between the terminal and a PC.
■
Mass storage mode (MSC)
1
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable.
･
"SD card connected" appears in the
status bar.
2
Drag and drop selected data
between the terminal and a PC.
❖
Information
･
You can transfer files using a microUSB cable on most
devices and the following operating systems (OSs)
that supports the USB mass-storage memory
interface.
- Microsoft Windows 7
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows XP
153
File management
If the terminal and a PC
*
are connected in a
pair on a Wi-Fi network, automatic
connection/disconnection of internal storage
of the terminal with a PC is enabled when the
terminal user comes in and out of the Wi-Fi
area. You can easily access to files in the
internal storage of the terminal from a
connected PC.
* Use Microsoft Windows 7 to make a pair
setting. Pair setting cannot be made under
Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows
Vista or other OS.
1
Connect a PC you want to set in a
pair to a Wi-Fi network.
2
Connect the terminal to a Wi-Fi
network (P.114).
3
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable.
･
When a confirmation screen for
installation of PC Companion software
appears on the terminal, tap [Skip].
4
Make sure that "Xperia XX SO-02E"
is displayed as a portable device
on the explorer of the PC.
5
Right click the portable device
icon, then click "
ネットワーク構成
(network composition)".
6
Click "
次へ
(Next)".
7
On the pop-up screen of the
terminal, tap [Pair].
8
On the network composition of the
portable device screen of the PC,
click "
完了
(Done)".
9
Disconnect the microUSB cable.
10
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Xperia
™
]
u
[Connectivity]
u
"Host name" (PC
name) in the "TRUSTED DEVICES"
field.
11
Tap [Connect].
･
The terminal and the PC are connected
in "Media transfer mode (MTP)" on a Wi-
Fi network, and you can exchange data
files.
Connecting the terminal to a PC
on a Wi-Fi network
154
File management
❖
Information
･
From the Home screen, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[Xperia
™
]
u
[Connectivity] to display
"Host name" (PC name) in the "TRUSTED DEVICES"
field. To cancel connection setting, tap the host
name and [Forget]. Until "Forget" is tapped, the
connection setting retains even if you connect/
disconnect repeatedly by coming in and out of a Wi-
Fi area.
･
If the privacy separator function for Wi-Fi network
(access point) is enabled, pair setting cannot be
made.
The Media Go computer application helps
you transfer and manage media content in
the terminal and PC.
With Media Go, you can load music from a CD
to a PC and transfer to the terminal.
･
You can install Media Go from PC Companion.
Activate PC Companion installed in a PC and
install Media Go with "Sony PC Companion"
screen. For information on how to install PC
Companion, see "When PC Companion is not
installed on your PC" (P.242).
❖
Information
･
You can also download Media Go from http://
mediago.sony.com/enu/features.
･
To learn more about how to use the Media Go
application, see the help section of the Media Go
application.
You can send/receive data of contacts,
photos or videos taken by the camera to/
from terminals etc. supporting infrared
communication function.
･
The communication range for infrared
communication is 20 cm or less. Keep the
devices pointing at the infrared data port
each other, and do not move them until data
exchange completes.
･
If the infrared data port is soiled, clean the
data port with a dry soft cloth to prevent from
scratching. Performing infrared
communication with the data port soiled or
scratched may cause communication failure.
･
Infrared communication may not be
performed in areas exposed to direct sunlight,
directly under fluorescent lights or near
infrared devices.
･
Depending on the terminal of the other party,
it may be difficult to exchange data.
Using Media Go
Using infrared
communication
155
File management
❖
Information
･
Do not cover the infrared data port with the fingers,
etc. while performing infrared communication.
･
Infrared communication for the terminal conforms to
IrMC version 1.1. However, some data cannot be sent
or received even if the receiver's phone conforms
IrMC version 1.1.
･
Authentication password and docomo apps
password may be required while sending or
receiving infrared data. Authentication password is a
4-digit number fixed up between you and other
party in advance. The same number string must be
entered by the sender and receiver. For details on
docomo apps password, see "docomo apps
password" (P.134).
･
If the terminal receives a call during infrared
communication, data exchange is interrupted and
the incoming call screen appears.
･
If the set alarm time comes during infrared
communication, data exchange is interrupted and
the alarm starts to sound.
･
is displayed in the status bar during infrared
communication.
･
You can send and receive Phonebook entries, My
profile, name card, sp-mode mail, Schedule & memo,
still images (.jpeg, .png, .gif, .bmp), videos (.mp4, .3gp)
and ToruCa. It may take a time to exchange data
depending on the data amount or device of other
party.
･
Some data, such as data with copyright protection,
etc., cannot be played back on other devices.
･
Received data cannot be played back or saved
depending on the sender's device, data type or data
amount.
･
Received images and videos are saved in the internal
storage and other data is saved in Phone memory.
156
File management
Start Infrared application and select data to
send. You can also send data from an
application menu such as Phonebook,
Album, etc.
■
Sending all data using infrared
communication application
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Infrared]
u
[Send all].
2
Tap [Phonebook]/[sp-mode mail]/
[Scedule&Memo]
u
[Start].
･
When you tap "sp-mode mail", select
."Inbox"/"Sent"/"Unsent".
3
Enter docomo apps password and
tap [OK].
4
Enter the same authentication
password as that of the recipient
and tap [OK]
u
［
OK
］
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
You can send My profile (except name card) from the
Home screen. Tap the left part of (Infrared
widget) and [OK]. Name card can be sent from the
"Phonebook" application.
･
For details on the "Phonebook" application, see
"Sending phonebook entries via infrared
communication" (P.92).
･
For sending from "Album", see "Sharing image files"
(P.197).
･
You cannot send 2 or more images or videos at a
time.
■
Receiving 1 item
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap
[Infrared]
u
[Receive]
u
[OK].
2
When receiving is complete, tap
[OK]
u
[OK].
■
Receiving all items
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Infrared]
u
[Receive all].
2
Enter docomo apps password and
tap [OK].
3
Enter the same authentication
password as that of the sender and
tap [OK]
u
[OK]
u
[OK]
u
[OK].
❖
Information
･
You can also receive a file from the Home screen. Tap
the right part of (Infrared widget) and [OK], and
after receiving is complete, tap [OK]
u
[OK].
･
When Phonebook, sp-mode mail and
Schedule&Memo are received, data on the terminal
is deleted before saved.
･
You cannot receive 2 or more videos at a time.
Sending data via infrared
communication
Receiving data via infrared
communication
157
File management
･
You may not save received data if the phone
memory is full.
･
A file name may be changed when saving. A file
named with 127 characters or more (Unicode) may
not be saved properly.
The Bluetooth function creates a wireless
connection to other Bluetooth devices, for
example, handsfree devices. A range within
10 meters, with no solid objects in between,
is recommended. You must turn on the
Bluetooth function to communicate with
Bluetooth devices. You may also have to
make pair setting for the terminal and
Bluetooth device.
❖
Information
･
By default, Bluetooth function is off. If you turn
Bluetooth on and then turn off the terminal,
Bluetooth function turns off. When you turn on the
terminal again, Bluetooth function turns on
automatically.
･
When you do not use Bluetooth function, turn it off
to save the battery.
■
Reception interference caused by
wireless LAN devices
The terminal's Bluetooth function and
wireless LAN devices use the same
frequency band (2.4GHz). If you use the
terminal near a wireless LAN device,
reception interference may occur or the
communications speed may lower. Also,
you may hear noise or have a connection
problem. In these cases, do the following:
･
Keep the Bluetooth device 10 meters or
more away from a wireless LAN device.
･
Within 10 meters, turn off either the
Bluetooth device or the wireless LAN
device.
* The terminal does not communicate
wirelessly with all types of Bluetooth
devices. Bluetooth DUN is not supported.
Using Bluetooth function
158
File management
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap in Bluetooth or drag it
right.
･
appears on the status bar and
Bluetooth function turns on.
3
Tap [Bluetooth].
4
Tap [SO-02E].
･
The terminal becomes detectable by
other Bluetooth devices for 2 minutes.
You can name the terminal. The name
appears on Bluetooth devices when you use
the Bluetooth function.
1
Make sure that the Bluetooth
function is on.
2
From the Home screen, tap Tap
[Settings]
u
[Bluetooth].
3
Tap and tap [Rename phone].
4
Enter a name.
5
Tap [Rename].
By making pair setting for the terminal and
another Bluetooth device, you can use the
device such as Bluetooth handsfree headset
etc. connecting to the terminal to make and
receive calls.
Once you have made pair setting for the
terminal and a Bluetooth device, the setting
is saved. When making pair setting for the
terminal and a Bluetooth device, you may
need to enter a passkey (PIN). The terminal
automatically tries the generic passkey
"0000". If this passkey does not work, see the
documentation of your Bluetooth device. You
do not need to re-enter the passkey the next
time you connect to a paired Bluetooth
device already set.
You cannot pair the terminal with two
Bluetooth headsets. However, you can pair
the terminal with two or more Bluetooth
devices of different profiles. The terminal
supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
A2DP, AVRCP, HFP, HID, HSP, OPP, PAN, PBAP,
and SPP.
1
Make sure that the Bluetooth
function is on.
Making the terminal detectable
with the Bluetooth function on
Entering the terminal's name
Making pair setting for the
terminal and Bluetooth device
159
File management
2
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Bluetooth].
3
Tap [Search for devices].
･
A list of detected Bluetooth devices
appears.
4
Tap a Bluetooth device name to
pair with the terminal.
5
Check a passkey on the "Bluetooth
pairing request" screen, then tap
[Pair].
･
You can use the Bluetooth device that
has been paired.
･
Some Bluetooth devices make
connections continuously after making
pair setting.
･
Authentication passcode may be
required on the "Bluetooth pairing
request" screen.
❖
Information
･
Make sure that the Bluetooth function and Bluetooth
detection function of the target device are on.
･
When you make pair setting with the Bluetooth
device supporting Secure Simple Pairing (SSP)
function, a passkey appears on the screen. Check the
passkey and make the pair setting.
1
Make sure that the Bluetooth
function is on.
2
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Bluetooth].
3
Tap [Search for devices].
･
A list of detected Bluetooth devices
appears.
･
Pair Bluetooth devices as required.
4
Tap the name of Bluetooth device
you want to connect.
･
While connecting to a device,
appears in the status bar and the
connection status appears under the
device name.
❖
Information
･
Tap on the name of connected Bluetooth device
to check the status of that Bluetooth device or
change the settings.
Connecting the terminal with
Bluetooth device
160
File management
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Bluetooth].
2
Tap the connected Bluetooth
device name.
3
Tap [OK].
･
To reconnect, tap the device name.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Bluetooth].
2
Tap in a Bluetooth device name
to unpair and tap [Unpair].
･
Connection disconnects and the pair
setting is canceled.
With Media server, you can share media files
with other client (DLNA: Digital Living
Network Alliance) devices using Wi-Fi
function.
Set Wi-Fi connection (P.112) with another
client device.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Connected devices].
･
When you activate for the first time,
"Welcome!" screen appears. Tap or
x
.
2
Tap , then tap [Media server].
･
Media server settings screen appears.
You can set the following items.
Deactivating the connection of
a Bluetooth device
Canceling the pair setting of a
Bluetooth device
Sharing files with DLNA
devices via Connected
devices (Media server)
Setting Connected devices
(Media server)
SO-02E
(server name)
Rename the terminal (server)
displayed on a client device.
Share content
Set to connect from a client device
to the terminal via Wi-Fi.
PENDING
DEVICES
Manage client devices waiting
access permissions.
REGISTERED
DEVICES
Manage client device registered to
the terminal.
161
File management
❖
Information
･
On the Media server screen, tap to set Wi-Fi
connection.
Set Wi-Fi connection with a DLNA device to
allow access from the terminal in advance.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Connected devices].
･
If Media server settings screen appears,
tap or
x
.
2
Tap the device name displayed in
the server list and tap the desired
category folder.
3
Tap a media file to play it.
❖
Information
･
When Wi-Fi connection is not enabled on the
terminal, tap [Wireless & networks] on the
"Connected devices" screen to set Wi-Fi connection.
Connect the terminal to a DLNA device via
Wi-Fi in advance.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Connected devices].
2
Tap , then tap [Media server]
and tap in Share content or
drag it right.
･
"Media server turned on" appears in the
status bar.
3
Tap
y
, tap , and tap [Album].
･
Album list screen appears.
4
Tap a tile you want to play.
5
Tap , then tap [See all...]
u
[Play
on device].
･
A "Play on device" screen appears.
6
Tap a device displayed on the "Play
on device" screen.
･
The file is played by a DLNA device.
Playing media files in the DLNA
device with the terminal
Playing a media file in the
terminal with a DLNA device
162
Applications
Applications
In dmenu, you can easily access sites
recommended by DOCOMO or convenient
applications.
1
From the Home screen, tap
[dmenu].
･
Browser activates to display "dmenu".
❖
Information
･
To use dmenu, Internet connection by packet
communication (LTE/3G/GPRS) or Wi-Fi is required.
･
For connecting dmenu and downloading
applications introduced in dmenu, packet
communication charge is applied separately. Some
applications automatically perform packet
communications.
･
Applications introduced by dmenu may include
charged ones.
You can obtain useful and interesting
contents which meet your needs at dmarket.
1
From the Home screen, tap
[dmarket].
･
When you activate for the first time, "d
マーケットソフトウェア使用許諾契約書
(License Agreement)" appears. Mark
[Agree] checkbox and tap [Start use].
❖
Information
･
For details on dmarket, refer to NTT DOCOMO
website.
dmenu
Opening dmenu
dmarket
Opening dmarket
163
Applications
With Google Play, you can directly access
useful applications or fun games which you
can download and install on the terminal.
And you can send feedback and comments
about an application, or report objectionable
application or incompatible application with
the terminal as an inappropriate content.
･
To use Google Play, you need to set Google
account (P.134).
･
Some applications and games are free of
charge, and the others are paid. In the
applications list of Market, distinction
between free and paid is clearly specified. For
details on purchasing, returning and
refunding of paid applications, see "Help"
(P.163).
1
From the Home screen, tap [Play
Store].
･
When you activate for the first time,
Terms of use window appears. Tap
[Accept].
2
Search application and tap
application you want to install.
･
Check the displayed contents carefully
and follow the onscreen instructions.
･
Be careful especially about applications
which access many functions or large
amount of data. If you perform
download operation, you are
responsible for the consequences of
using this application on the terminal.
❖
Information
･
Be sure to check the security of application, then
install it at your own risk. The terminal may be
infected with a virus and the data may be damaged.
･
NTT DOCOMO is not liable for malfunctions, if any,
caused by the application you installed. In such case,
the repair is charged even during the warranty
period.
･
NTT DOCOMO is not liable for any disadvantage
brought to you or any third party due to an
application you installed.
･
Some applications automatically perform packet
communications. Packet communication is kept
active unless you disconnect it or the time-out is
occurred. To disconnect packet communication
manually, from the Home screen, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[More...]
u
[Mobile networks] and unmark
[Data enabled].
･
Some applications may be updated automatically.
Play Store
Installing applications
164
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap [Play
Store].
2
Tap and [My Apps].
3
Tap the applications you want to
delete, then tap [Uninstall]
u
[OK].
･
When you uninstall charged
applications, a screen for refund may
appear. For details, see "Help" (P.163).
When you need help or have any questions
about Google Play, display the Google Play
screen, then tap and tap [Help]. The
Browser opens the Google Play Help web
page.
Osaifu-Keitai equipped with IC card is a
function which allows you to pay money or
to use coupon, stamp-rally, etc. only by
holding the terminal over an IC card reader in
stores etc.
You can access a site or website, obtain the
latest coupon, check credit or payment of
electronic money, etc. by holding the
terminal over the IC card reader. In addition,
you can lock your Osaifu-Keitai to provide
against loss or theft, and you can use Osaifu-
Keitai with safe.
For details on Osaifu-Keitai, refer to Mobile
Phone User's Guide [sp-mode] smartphone
version.
* A setting from the dedicated website or
application is required to use Osaifu-Keitai
compatible services.
Precautions on using Osaifu-Keitai
･
The data (including electronic money, points,
etc.) in the IC card may be lost or modified
because of the malfunction of the terminal
(When we take your Osaifu-Keitai for repair
etc., as we cannot take it with data remained,
you are required to erase the data by
yourself). For support such as reissuance,
restoration, temporary preservation or
Deleting application
Help
Osaifu-Keitai
165
Applications
transfer of data, contact Osaifu-Keitai
compatible service providers. For important
data, be sure to use a service with backup
service.
･
If the data in the IC card is lost, modified or
damaged by any means related to Osaifu-
Keitai compatible service such as malfunction
or model change, DOCOMO assumes no
responsibility for the loss of data.
･
If the terminal is stolen or misplaced,
immediately contact Osaifu-Keitai
compatible service provider for an advice.
･
The terminal does not support iC transfer
service.
1
From the Home screen, tap
then tap [Osaifu-Keitai].
2
Select a service you want to use
from a service list.
･
At the first time you activate Osaifu-
Keitai, an initial setting screen appears.
Follow the onscreen instructions.
You can exchange data with an IC card reader
only by holding mark over the card reader.
･
When holding mark over an IC card reader,
make sure not to hit the terminal strongly.
･
Hold mark horizontally over the center of
the IC card reader.
･
Slowly move the terminal to hold mark
over the IC card reader.
･
If mark is not recognized even when
holding over the IC card reader, try slightly
picking the terminal up off the reader, or
moving the terminal back, forth and around.
･
If there are metal objects between mark
and an IC card reader, scanning may be failed.
And note that a sticker put on nearby the
mark may affect communication
performance.
Using Osaifu-Keitai
Holding Osaifu-Keitai over IC
card reader
166
Applications
❖
Information
･
You can scan and write data to or from an IC card
reader without activating Osaifu-Keitai compatible
application.
･
The function is available even if the terminal is off,
but it is not available when the battery pack is not
attached. Even if the battery pack is attached, the
function may not be available when you leave the
terminal off for a long time or the battery level is low,
etc.
Use "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting" to restrict the
use of Osaifu-Keitai function and related
services.
･
Osaifu-Keitai lock is different from screen lock
for the terminal, SIM card lock.
1
From the Home screen, tap
then tap [Osaifu-Keitai].
2
Tap [Lock Settings] at the bottom
right of the "Osaifu-Keitai" screen.
3
Follow the onscreen instructions
to enter unlock pattern.
❖
Information
･
is displayed in the status bar when you set
"Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".
･
Note that you cannot cancel "Osaifu-Keitai Lock
Setting", if the battery runs out while using "Osaifu-
Keitai Lock Setting". Be careful about remaining
battery level. If the battery runs out, charge the
terminal before canceling "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".
･
You need to enter unlock pattern to use Osaifu-Keitai
menu while using "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".
･
IC card unlock pattern will not be deleted even if you
reset the terminal.
･
Note that you cannot cancel "Osaifu-Keitai Lock
Setting" if you forget both the lock pattern and
answer for security question.
"iD" is a convenient electronic money by
credit clearance scheme. You can enjoy
shopping simply and conveniently only by
holding Osaifu-Keitai with credit information
set or the iD-compatible card over the IC card
reader in stores. Because up to 2 types of
credit information can be registered in
Osaifu-Keitai, you can use them according to
the benefits, etc. It also supports cashing,
depending on the card issuer.
･
To use iD with Osaifu-Keitai, subscribing to a
card issuer that supports iD, settings for iD
setting application are required.
･
The charges required for iD service (including
the annual charge) vary by card issuer.
･
For using the application, a packet
communication charge is applied.
Locking Osaifu-Keitai function
iD
設定アプリ
(iD setting
application)
167
Applications
･
A packet communication fee for oversea use
differs from the one in Japan.
･
For details on iD, refer to iD website (http://id-
credit.com/ (In Japanese only)).
ToruCa is an electronic card that can be
obtained to mobile terminals. It can be
obtained from the IC card reader or site as
store information, coupon ticket, etc.
Obtained ToruCa is saved to the "ToruCa"
application. Use the "ToruCa" application to
display, search or update.
For details on ToruCa, refer to "
ご利用ガイド
ブック
(sp
モード編
) (Mobile Phone User's
Guide [sp-mode]) (in Japanese only)".
❖
Information
･
For obtaining, displaying or updating ToruCa, a
packet communication charge may be applied.
･
Some ToruCa provided to i-mode terminal may not
be obtained/displayed/updated.
･
Depending on the settings of IP (Information
Provider), the following functions may not be
available.
- Obtaining/Updating from the IC card reader,
sharing ToruCa, moving to microSD card, copying/
displaying map
･
Some ToruCa which can be displayed in a map from
ToruCa (details) may not be displayed in a map from
the ToruCa list depending on the IP settings.
･
While using Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting, you cannot
obtain ToruCa with an IC card reader.
･
If you mark
重複チェック
(Duplication check),
obtaining the same ToruCa redundantly is not
available. To obtain the same ToruCa redundantly,
unmark
重複チェック
(Duplication check).
･
When you send ToruCa attaching to email, it is sent
in the condition before obtaining ToruCa (details).
･
Depending on email application, ToruCa received via
the emails may not be saved.
･
Depending on browser, ToruCa cannot be obtained.
･
When ToruCa is moved/copied to the microSD card,
it is moved/copied in the condition before obtaining
ToruCa (details).
･
You may not be able to obtain ToruCa with an IC card
reader, if you do not make initial setting for Osaifu-
Keitai.
ToruCa
168
Applications
1Seg is a terrestrial digital TV broadcasting
service that allows mobile devices to receive
broadcasted data along with images and
sounds. You can also acquire detailed
program information, participate in quiz
programs, enjoy TV shopping, etc.
For details on "1Seg", refer to the following
website.
The Association for Promotion of Digital
Broadcasting
http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/
Using 1Seg
1Seg is a service provided by TV
broadcasting enterprises (stations), etc. A
communication fee for receiving video
picture and sound is not required. Contact
NHK for details on your NHK viewing fees.
There are 2 types of information displayed in
the data broadcasting area: "Data
broadcasting" and "Data broadcasting site".
"Data broadcasting" is displayed using
airwave along with images and sounds; while
"Data broadcasting site" is displayed by
connecting to a site provided by TV
broadcasting enterprises (stations), etc.,
using information of data broadcasting.
For viewing "Data broadcasting site", etc.,
packet communication fees are charged.
･
Some sites require information fees.
Airwaves
1Seg is one of the broadcast services and a
different type of radio waves (airwaves) from
that of FOMA service is received. Therefore,
regardless of whether you are in or out of Xi
service or FOMA service area, it cannot be
received where airwaves do not reach or
during broadcasting interruptions.
Also, even in a terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting service area, reception
condition may be poor or reception may be
unavailable in the following places:
･
A place far from the tower that the airwaves
are sent from
･
Mountain-ringed regions or a place between
buildings where airwaves are interrupted by
geography or buildings
･
Tunnel, underground or far back from a
building where airwaves are weak or do not
reach
Using 1Seg antenna cable
To watch 1Seg program on the terminal, use
supplied 1Seg antenna cable.
If Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)
is used for watching, connect Stereo Headset
with Microphone (Sample) to the 1Seg
1Seg
169
Applications
antenna when inserting to or removing from
the terminal.
1
Connect the plug of Stereo
Headset with Microphone
(Sample) to headset connector of
the 1Seg antenna cable ( ).
2
Connect the plug of the 1Seg
antenna cable to the headset
connector of the terminal ( ).
❖
Information
･
If Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample) is
removed from 1Seg antenna cable while watching
1Seg using the Stereo Headset with Microphone
(Sample), sound is not emitted from the speaker. To
hear sound via speaker, remove 1Seg antenna cable
then reattach the antenna cable alone.
Make channel setting when you activate
1Seg for the first time. After channel setting is
done, 1Seg programs can be watched.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [Watch].
･
If [More] is tapped, operation guide for
1Seg watching appears.
3
Tap [Channel setting]
u
[Current
area].
･
Available channels are searched.
4
Tap entry box, enter a title name
and tap [OK].
･
To return the 1Seg menu, tap
x
.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, tap [Select area] in Step 2 then select
area to make channel setting.
･
Channel setting may not be made in the area where
a terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service has just
started.
Initial settings for 1Seg
170
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [Activate 1Seg].
･
1Seg watching screen appears. Tap the
image to temporarily view program
information such as program name.
❖
Information
･
It may take a time to acquire image data or
broadcasted data when you activate 1Seg or change
channels due to characteristic of digital
broadcasting.
･
According to the airwave condition, image or sound
may be interrupted or stopped.
･
If the terminal receives a call while watching 1Seg,
1Seg is interrupted and resumes after the call ends.
■
1Seg screen
a
Program information
b
Image
c
Data broadcasting : Display data broadcasting
content.
d
Broadcasting station
e
Setting
f
Remote controller : Display numeric keys to switch
channels and keys for searching stations.
g
View optional menu
h
DOWN selection/UP selection : Select previous or
next channel you are currently watching.
i
Mute
j
Subtitle
k
Remote controller for data broadcasting : Display
operation keys for data broadcasting such as Move
focus, Select focus, Back, Show numeric keys, etc.
l
1Seg status bar : Display icons for off timer, channel,
reception level, subtitle, muting, volume, etc.
❖
Information
･
Press
m
on the 1Seg watching screen to adjust
volume.
･
Recording 1Seg program is not supported.
･
You can watch 1Seg turning the terminal sideways. If
the screen orientation does not change
automatically when you turn the terminal sideways,
from the Home screen, tap , then [Settings]
u
[Display], then mark [Auto-rotate screen] checkbox.
Watching 1Seg program
1Seg watching screen
(with data broadcasting)
k
l
j
d
a
b
c
fg
1Seg watching screen (full screen)
l
a
bj
ed f hi
171
Applications
･
For data broadcasting, screen display supports
portrait only.
･
Flick the 1Seg watching screen left and right to select
the previous or next channel you are currently
watching.
･
To exit 1Seg, tap
x
on the 1Seg watching screen.
1
Tap on the 1Seg watching
screen (P.169) then tap [Setting].
･
You can set the following options.
Setting 1Seg
Channel info
Display information for available
channels.
Program info
Display information for received
programs.
Channel list
Registered areas (broadcasting
service area) are listed as a channel
list.
Channel setting
Make channel setting.
Add to channel
list
Add a channel from 1Seg watching
screen.
Program guide
Activate "G
ガイド番組表
(Program
table)" to view program table.
･
Alternatively, tap [Program
guide] on the 1Seg menu screen
to activate "G
ガイド番組表
(Program table)".
Switch display
Switch display between image and
data broadcasting.
Caption setting
Switch Display subtitle to on or off.
Off timer
Make a timer setting to end 1Seg
watching.
Main/sub sound
Set main/sub sound.
Sound switch
Set to switch sound.
Volume setting
Adjust the volume level.
Sound effect
setting
Switch sound effect of data
broadcasting between on and off.
Reset
confirmation
status
Initialize the confirmation screen
display.
Back to data BC
Display data broadcasting.
Tune service
You can select a sub-channel when
several programs (services) are
broadcasted for separated sub-
channels in a channel.
TVlink
Stored TVlinks appear.
Operation guide
A guide for watching 1Seg appears.
172
Applications
For data broadcasting, you can view various
information by following the onscreen
instructions.
❖
Information
･
To watch data broadcasting, call charge or packet
communication charge is not required. If you use
additional services of data broadcasting, etc. via
packet communication, packet communication fees
are charged.
For some data broadcasting programs, link
information to related websites (TVlink) is
displayed. Save TVlinks to connect to related
websites later.
Saving TVlinks
1
On the 1Seg watching screen (data
broadcasting) (P.169), select
TVlink to store.
･
After this step, follow the onscreen
instructions to operate.
Display TVlinks
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [TVlink].
･
A TV link list screen appears.
3
Select a TVlink.
■
When a link content or HTML content
is selected
Tap [Yes].
❖
Information
･
Some TVlinks have period of validity. Out of date
TVlinks are no longer available.
Watching data broadcasting
Using TVlinks
173
Applications
Viewing/Deleting details of TVlink
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [TVlink] and tap .
･
Menu appears.
❖
Information
･
On the TVlink list screen, touch and hold a TVlink to
display menus for displaying detailed information,
etc.
Available channels vary depending on the
area (broadcasting service area) you are
using in.
Storing broadcasting service areas
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [Channel setting]
u
[Current
area].
･
Available channels are searched.
3
Tap entry box, enter a title name
and tap [OK].
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, tap [Select area] in Step 2 then select
area to make channel setting.
Changing broadcasting service areas
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [Channel list] to select a list
from registered channel lists.
･
Broadcasting service area is changed.
Check the
number of
registration
Check the number of stored
TVlinks.
Delete all
Delete all stored TVlinks.
Delete selected
Delete several stored TVlinks.
Mark a TVlink to delete and tap ,
tap [Delete data?]
u
[YES].
Storing/Changing
broadcasting service areas
174
Applications
■
Using menus on the channel list
selection screen
Touch and hold the channel list selection
screen to display menus for displaying
information, setting, editing titles, deleting,
etc.
Change TV remote number assigned to each
broadcasting station. Each broadcasting
station can be called up via the
corresponding TV remote number.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [Channel list]
u
Tap a list you
want to change.
3
Touch and hold channel
information.
4
Tap [Remote control No.]
u
Tap a
broadcasting station you want to
change.
5
Tap remote control number you
want to store.
6
Tap
x
and [YES].
You can set, initialize, and reset watching
screen, data broadcasting screen.
Initializing settings
You can initialize the channel setting and
1Seg setting.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
tap [1Seg].
2
Tap [User setting]
u
[Reset channel
setting]/[Reset 1Seg settings].
3
Tap [YES].
Changing numbers for TV
remote
Making User setting
175
Applications
You can listen to the FM radio with the
terminal. Tuning can be made automatically
or manually, and you can register your
favorite channels to Favorites. To use FM
radio, use a handsfree device such as Stereo
Headset with Microphone (Sample), etc. or a
headphone. They work as antenna.
1
Connect Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample) to the
terminal.
･
For connection of Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample), see "Using
Stereo Headset with Microphone"
(P.194).
2
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [FM radio].
･
FM radio screen appears and selecting
channel starts automatically. You can
select channel by flicking the screen left
and right. To select channel
automatically furthermore, go to Step 3.
3
Tap , then tap [Search for
channels].
･
Alternatively, tap /
to search for channels.
･
The search ends when radio waves are
received.
4
Tap , then tap [+ Add XX.X
to favorites].
5
Tap entry box, enter a name and
tap [Save].
･
The frequency bands of searched
channels are registered to Favorites.
6
To stop the FM radio, tap .
❖
Information
･
You can return to the Home screen to perform
another operation while listening to FM radio in the
background. To return to the FM radio screen, from
the Home screen, tap then tap [FM radio], or drag
the status bar downward and tap [FM radio] on the
Notification panel.
･
When the docomo mini UIM card is not inserted, the
frequency band range is 87.5MHz - 108.0MHz. You
cannot listen to the FM radio programs in Japan.
FM radio
Searching and registering
channels
176
Applications
■
FM radio screen
a
Monaural/stereo effect
b
Play in speaker/Play in handsfree
c
Channel point displayed in a good radio wave
condition
d
On/Off of FM radio
e
View optional menu
f
Broadcasting station now listening
g
Channel assigned to favorite
h
Search channels automatically
i
Move left to select next favorite
j
Favorites saving/editing/tuning
k
Move right to select next favorite
1
On the FM radio screen, tap .
2
Tap [Play in speaker]/[Play in
headphones].
･
The sound output is switched to the
speaker/handsfree device.
You can shoot still picture and video by
tapping the shutter icon or screen. You can
hold the camera horizontally or vertically to
shoot still pictures (when shooting with 3D
Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep
Panorama, hold the camera horizontally). For
recording videos, screen display supports
landscape only. Still pictures and videos are
saved automatically in the internal storage or
a microSD card.
･
All pictures or videos that you capture on the
terminal are stored into the internal storage or
a microSD card. When saving to a microSD
card, insert a microSD card before using the
camera. You cannot take a photo while the
terminal is reading/writing data, for example
transferring a file from Media Go.
･
If you use microSD card with an i-mode
compatible terminal, photos and videos shot
by the terminal cannot be shown.
･
Avoid copyright infringements when you
handle photos, videos, or sound recorded
using the terminal, e.g. copy/edit. In addition,
avoid rights infringements of portraits by
using these photos without consent, altering
them or by other means. Note that capturing
Switching the speaker and
handsfree device
c
e
f
k
j
i
g
h
a
b
d
Camera
Before using the camera
177
Applications
or recording a stage performance,
entertainment or exhibition may be
prohibited even if for personal use.
■
About the Copyright and Portrait rights
Objects, such as movies, still images, and sounds,
recorded using the terminal are prohibited by the
copyright law from use without consent of the
copyright holders, unless intended for personal use
or any other purpose permitted by law. Also, using
or transformation of other person's portrait or
name without his or her permission may violate the
portrait right. When you present recorded images
or sounds in a public place such as on an Internet
home page, make sure to be aware of the copyright
and portrait right. Note that some performances,
shows, and exhibitions may not allow
photography, movie shooting, or sound recording
even for personal use. Transmission of images
related to copyright or beyond the scope provided
in the copyright law is not available.
Please be considerate of the privacy of
individuals around you when taking and
sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
If you cause the public any trouble using the
terminal, you may be punished under law or
regulations (for example, nuisance
prevention ordinance).
Note on 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep
Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama
･
In the following cases, 3D Sweep Panorama/
Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama do not
work properly.
- Shooting a moving object
- Shooting the main object that is too close to
the camera
- Shooting an object with repetition of the
same pattern such as a sky, beach, grass, etc.
- Shooting a big object
- Shooting an object with constantly
changing pattern such as a wave, waterfall,
etc.
･
If shooting angle does not increase enough
for 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/
Sweep Panorama within a certain period of
time, the part which was not taken is recorded
in gray.
To avoid this, move the camera faster when
shooting.
･
Because two or more images are joined
together, joints may not recorded smoothly.
･
Images may be blurred or may not be taken in
a dark scene.
･
Under the flickering light source such as a
fluorescent light, you may not be able to
shoot properly since brightness or color
balance of joined image may be unstable.
178
Applications
･
If brightness, color balance and focus point of
whole image to be taken with 3D Sweep
Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep
Panorama are radically different from those of
the focused image, image may not be shot
properly.
･
In the following cases, shooting for 3D Sweep
Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep
Panorama may be stopped.
- Moved the camera too fast/too slow
- Blurred too much
- Moved the camera in the opposite direction
of the shooting
Notes on viewing pictures shot with
3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi
Angle
･
Do not view 3D images shot by the terminal
with a 3D compatible monitor for a long time.
Doing so may cause unpleasant symptom
such as eyestrain, fatigue, feeling ill, etc.
･
For viewing 3D images, you are
recommended to take a proper break.
Necessary break length and frequency vary by
individual. Judge for yourself.
･
When you experience unpleasant symptom,
stop viewing 3D images until you get healed
up and seek the advice of a doctor if
necessary. Also refer to the manuals come
with the device for connecting to the terminal
or software.
･
Vision of child (especially younger than 7
years) is during development. Before a child
views 3D images, seek the advise of a doctor
such as pediatrics or ophthalmologist. Adults
should supervise a child for the above
precautions.
179
Applications
■
Still picture shooting screen
■
Video shooting screen
a
Capturing mode icon
b
Display area of icons showing selected settings
c
Icons showing set items
d
Display area of status icons showing selected
settings
e
Switch icon for photo/video
f
Navigation bar
g
Shutter (still picture)
Start/Stop recording (video)
h
Recent shooting history
･
Touch the icon on the shooting screen and flick it
to the left of the screen (up when in portrait view)
to display the last 5 shots.
･
Tap to open viewing/playback screen for still
pictures and videos.
･
Tap an icon displayed by touching and holding to
perform the following operations.
: View playback screen of photos and videos
: Share
: Delete
❖
Information
･
On the shooting screen, pinch-out/in or press
m
to zoom in/out.
･
To end the camera, tap Navigation bar, then tap
x
.
Shooting a still picture
Tap the shutter icon ( ) or screen to shoot
still pictures. Shot still pictures are
automatically saved in the internal storage/
microSD card.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
Shooting screen and key
operations
a
b
c
e
f
gh
d
a
b
c
de
f
gh
Shooting still pictures
180
Applications
■
Tapping the shutter icon ( )
Tap the shutter icon ( ) on the shooting
screen.
･
To shoot still pictures using auto-focus
function, touch and hold the shutter
icon ( ) and release your finger when
the focus frame turns green and sound
beeps. A picture is taken as soon as you
release the finger. If the focus frame
turns red, auto-focus does not operate
correctly.
■
Tapping the screen
On the shooting screen, tap
u
[Capturing method]
u
[Touch
capture]
u
Tap the screen.
･
To shoot still pictures using auto-focus
function, touch and hold the screen
and release your finger when the focus
frame turns green and sound beeps. A
picture is taken as soon as you release
the finger. If the focus frame turns red,
auto-focus does not operate correctly.
❖
Information
･
When you connect Stereo Headset with Microphone
(Sample), commercially available earphone set or
other Bluetooth device, shutter sound may be softer.
Shooting using Quick launch
1
On the SIM card lock/screen unlock
screen, touch and hold /
then drag to left.
･
If "Quick launch" (P.188) is set to
"Launch and capture", the camera is
activated to shoot a photo
immediately. Shot pictures are
automatically saved in the internal
storage/microSD card.
❖
Information
･
"Quick launch" (P.188) is set to "Launch and capture"
by default. The operation of Quick launch can be
selected from "Launch and capture" and "Launch
only".
Using zoom
1
On the shooting screen, press
m
.
❖
Information
･
On the shooting screen, pinch-in/out the screen to
zoom out/in.
･
Zoom is not available while using Front camera/3D
Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep
Panorama.
181
Applications
Adjusting Exposure value
1
On the shooting screen, tap the
shooting mode icon (P.178), then
tap [Normal].
2
On the shooting screen, tap ,
then [Exposure value].
3
Tap or drag the bar to adjust the
exposure value.
You can use face detection to bring an off-
center face into focus. The camera
automatically detects up to 5 faces at a time.
A yellow frame indicates a face to focus on,
and white frames indicate the rest. An
appropriate face is determined by distance
from the camera and off-center balance, and
is focused automatically. You can also tap one
of the frames to select which face should be
in focus.
Setting face detection
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap the
shooting mode icon (P.178), then
tap [Normal].
3
On the shooting screen, tap ,
then tap "Focus mode" (P.186).
4
Tap (Face detection).
❖
Information
･
"Scenes" (P.185) is set to "Landscape"/"Night scene"/
"Document", Face detection cannot be used.
Taking a photo using face detection
1
With Face detection set, point the
camera at the subject.
･
Each detected face is framed (up to 5
faces).
2
Tap the frame you want to focus on
or let the camera select which face
to focus on without tapping.
･
A yellow frame shows the face in focus.
Face detection
182
Applications
3
Shoot a picture.
･
For information on how to shoot
pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"
(P.178).
･
Shot pictures are automatically saved in
the internal storage/microSD card.
Smile detection allows you to capture a face
just as it smiles. The camera detects up to 5
faces and selects 1 face for smile detection
and auto focus. A yellow frame shows which
face is selected. When the selected face
smiles, the frame turns to green and the
camera automatically takes a photo.
Setting smile detection
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap ,
then tap "Smile detection" (P.186).
･
You can select smile level for the smile
detection feature from "Big smile"/
"Average smile"/"Small smile"/"Off". Set
"Off" to cancel smile detection.
Taking a photo using smile detection
1
With Smile detection set, point the
camera at the subject.
･
Each detected face is framed (up to 5
faces).
･
The camera selects which face to focus
on. A yellow frame shows the face in
focus.
2
The camera automatically takes
the photo when the subject in
focus smiles.
･
Shot pictures are automatically saved in
the internal storage/microSD card.
･
If no smile is detected, operate the
steps in "Shooting a still picture" (P.178)
to shoot a picture.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap the
capturing mode icon (P.178), then
select capturing mode.
Smile detection
Changing capturing mode
183
Applications
Capturing mode
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap the
shooting mode icon (P.178), then
tap [Front camera].
3
Shoot a picture.
･
For information on how to shoot
pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"
(P.178).
❖
Information
･
When using Front camera, "Self-timer", "Smile
detection", "Geotagging", "Capturing method", "Data
storage" can be set. Other "Still camera setting"
(P.185) are not supported by Front camera.
- Resolution for Front camera is "VGA". The resolution
cannot be changed.
- The settings take over the camera settings set at
the time when switching.
Item Icon Description
Capturing
mode
Select the shooting method.
Scene
recognition
The camera determines
most suitable scene effect.
A corresponding scene
icon appears when the
scene is recognized.
Normal A standard shooting
mode.
Front
camera
P. 1 8 2
3D
Sweep
Panorama
P. 1 8 3
Sweep
Multi Angle
Sweep
Panorama
Using Front camera to shoot
pictures
184
Applications
Use Sweep Panorama to shoot panoramic
image with wide angle.
Aligning the white frame on the screen with
the black frame, move the camera slowly
toward the set shooting direction to shoot.
Using 3D Sweep Panorama allows you to
shoot 3D pictures.
･
Photos shot with 3D Sweep Panorama cannot
be displayed in 3D on the terminal. View them
with a 3D compatible monitor using a
microSD card etc.
･
Photos shot with Sweep Multi Angle can be
viewed three-dimensionally by tilting the
terminal left and right.
Setting 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep
Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap the
shooting mode icon (P.178), then
tap [3D Sweep Panorama]/[Sweep
Multi Angle]/[Sweep Panorama].
･
Tap to select "On" or "Off " for "Photo
light" (P.186).
･
For 3D Sweep Panorama, tap to
select "Panorama image size" (P.186).
･
For Sweep Panorama, tap to select
"Shooting direction" (P.188).
Using 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep
Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama to
shoot pictures
1
With 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep
Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama set,
point the camera at the subject.
2
Shoot a still picture.
･
For information on how to shoot
pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"
(P.178).
･
A white frame and big black frame
appear on the screen.
Using Sweep Panorama
185
Applications
3
Aligning the white frame with the
black frame, slowly move the
camera from left to right.
･
If you change shooting direction for
Sweep Panorama, slowly move the
camera in the set direction.
･
Shot pictures are saved automatically in
the internal storage/microSD card.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
The still picture shooting screen (P.178)
appears.
2
On the shooting screen, tap ,
then tap item to set.
･
Several setting icons are displayed on
the shooting screen in advance. The
displayed setting icons change
depending on the setting conditions.
･
While using 3D Sweep Panorama/
Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama,
tap the setting item icon displayed on
the shooting screen to change the
setting.
･
For setting items and icons, see "Still
camera setting" (P.185).
3
Tap an option in the selected
setting.
･
If you change setting options, icons
displayed on the shooting screen
change to the set items.
❖
Information
･
On the recording screen, tap to display setting
items. Touch and hold an item and then drag it to the
area where setting item icons are displayed to
replace icons on the recording screen.
･
To delete a setting item icon displayed on the
recording screen, touch and hold an icon and drag it
to displayed in the center of the screen.
･
Capturing mode icons and setting icons (P.178)
cannot be replaced or deleted.
･
Setting item icons cannot be changed or deleted
while using Front camera/3D Sweep Panorama/
Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama.
Changing the recording
settings
186
Applications
Still camera setting
Item Icon Description
Scenes
Use Scenes to quickly set up the camera
for various scene conditions. Use when
"Capturing mode" is set to "Normal".
OFF Adjust color shade or
brightness automatically.
Portrait Settings are optimized to
give brighter and warmer
skin tones.
Landscape
Shoot landscape
depicting trees with vivid
color and focusing on
distant objects.
Night
scene
Shoot a crisp and clear
night scene. Due to long
exposure time, be careful
not to shake camera.
Night
portrait
Suitable for shooting
persons against the
nightscape background.
Due to long exposure
time, be careful not to
shake camera.
Beach
and snow
Reconstruct beach and
snowy scene brightly and
vividly.
Sports To shoot fast-moving
object, shorten exposure
time to minimize motion
blurring.
Scenes
Party Shoot an indoor picture
creating good
atmosphere of indoor
lighting. Due to long
exposure time, be careful
not to shake camera.
Document
Use for shooting text or
graphics. It allows to
capture a clear, bright, and
easy to read text.
Resolution
Select image sizes and aspect ratios
before shooting. An image with a higher
resolution requires more memory. Use
when "Capturing mode" is set to
"Normal"/"Scene recognition".
8MP
4:3
8 megapixel image size
with 4:3 aspect ratio.
Suitable for viewing on
normal size screen or
printing in high
resolution.
6MP
16:9
6 megapixel image size
with 16:9 aspect ratio. A
high resolution wide-
screen format. Suitable for
viewing on wide-screen.
2MP
4:3
2 megapixel image size
with 4:3 aspect ratio.
Suitable for viewing on
normal size screen.
2MP
16:9
2 megapixel image size
with 16:9 aspect ratio.
Suitable for viewing on
wide-screen.
Item Icon Description
187
Applications
Panorama
image size
Set image size for 3D Sweep Panorama
Use when "Capturing mode" is set to "3D
Sweep Panorama".
16:9 16:9 aspect ratio. Suitable
for viewing on wide-
screen.
Standard
Standard size for
Panorama image. Suitable
for Panorama shooting.
Photo light
Use the photo light to shoot when
lighting conditions are poor or in
backlight.
On The photo light turns on.
Off The photo light does not
turn on.
Self-timer
Use it to take self-portraits, or group
photos where everyone can be in the
photo. You can also use the self-timer to
avoid camera shake.
On
(10 sec.)
Shutter clicks 10 seconds
after tapping.
On
(2 sec.)
Shutter clicks 2 seconds
after tapping.
Off Shutter clicks when
tapping.
Item Icon Description
Smile
detection
Shoot faces at the moment they smile.
The camera detects up to 5 faces and
selects 1 face for smile detection and
auto focus. When the selected face
smiles, the camera automatically shoots.
･
You can select smile level for the smile
detection feature.
Big
smile
Shoot when a big smile is
detected.
Average
smile
Shoot when a smile is
detected.
Small
smile
Shoot when even a tiny
smile is detected.
Off Cancel smile detection.
Focus
mode
Set focus controls. Use when "Capturing
mode" is set to "Normal".
Single
autofocus
The camera automatically
focuses on the subject.
Multi
autofocus
The camera automatically
focuses on several points
on the shooting screen.
The white focus frames
turn to green if focused
on.
Face
detection
P. 1 8 0
Touch
focus
Tap an object on the
shooting screen. The
focus frame moves onto
the tapped place.
Exposure
value
P. 1 8 0
Item Icon Description
188
Applications
ISO
Set ISO sensitivity. Shoot clear picture
reducing blur even in a place where
lightning is poor. Use when "Capturing
mode" is set to "Normal".
Auto Set to the appropriate
sensitivity between "100"
and "800".
100 Set sensitivity to 100.
200 Set sensitivity to 200.
400 Set sensitivity to 400.
800 Set sensitivity to 800.
White
balance
The white balance setting adjusts the
color balance according to the light
source. Use when "Capturing mode" is
set to "Normal".
Auto Adjust the color balance
automatically to the light
source.
Incandescent
Adjust the color balance
for lighting like
incandescent bulb.
Fluorescent
Adjust the color balance
for lighting like
fluorescent.
Daylight Adjust the color balance
for a sunny place.
Cloudy Adjust the color balance
for a cloudy sky or shaded
area.
Item Icon Description
Metering
Measure the brightness on the shooting
screen to determine a well-balanced
exposure automatically. Use when
"Capturing mode" is set to "Normal".
Center Put emphasis at the
center of the shooting
screen and measure
photometry at whole
view finder to adjust the
exposure.
Average Adjust the exposure
based on the brightness
of the whole shooting
screen.
Spot Measure photometry only
at the center of the
shooting screen to adjust
the exposure.
Image
stabilizer
Compensate for photo blur caused by
small movements of the hand while
shooting. Use when "Capturing mode" is
set to "Normal".
On Reduce blur.
Off The stabilizer is not used.
Item Icon Description
189
Applications
❖
Note
･
Some settings cannot be used in combination with
one another.
Geotagging
Tag photos location information for the
shooting spot.
Enable "Enabling Wireless networks to
find position" (P.209) or "Enabling GPS
function" (P.209) in the location
information service to add Geotag. For
details on location information, see
"Location services" (P.207).
･
Geotag (location information) enables
to specify the shooting spot of the
photo.
On Location information is
added to the taken photo.
Off Shooting location cannot
be viewed on a map.
Capturing
method
Set the shooting method.
On-screen
button
Set to shoot picture by
tapping the shutter icon
on the shooting screen.
Touch
capture
Set to shoot picture by
tapping the shooting
screen.
Shooting
direction
Set shooting direction for Sweep
Panorama. Use when "Capturing mode"
is set to "Sweep Panorama".
Right Shoot moving the camera
from left to right.
Left Shoot moving the camera
from right to left.
Down Shoot moving the camera
downward.
Up Shoot moving the camera
upward.
Item Icon Description
Quick
launch
On the SIM card lock/screen unlock
screen, touch and hold / then
drag to left to activate the camera. Use
when "Capturing mode" is set to
"Normal"/"Scene recognition".
Launch
and capture
Activate the camera to
shoot a photo
immediately.
Launch
only
Activate the camera.
Data
storage
Set the saving location for shot images.
Internal
storage
Save shot images in the
internal storage.
SD card Save shot images in a
microSD card.
Item Icon Description
190
Applications
Recording
Tap the start recording icon ( )/stop
recording icon ( ) or recording screen to
record video. For video recording screen, only
landscape screen is supported. Recorded
data is automatically saved in the internal
storage/microSD card.
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
Tap on the photo/video switch
icon (P.178) to display the video
recording screen.
■
Tapping the start recording ( )/stop
recording ( ) icon
On the recording screen, tap to start
recording
u
Tap to stop recording.
■
Tapping the screen
On the recording screen, tap
u
"Capturing method"
u
"Touch
capture"
u
Tap the screen to start
recording
u
Tap the screen to stop
recording.
❖
Information
･
Do not cover the microphone with fingers etc. when
recording videos.
･
When you connect Stereo Headset with Microphone
(Sample), commercially available earphone set or
other Bluetooth device, shutter sound may be softer.
Using Front video camera to record
1
On the recording screen, tap the
recording mode icon (P.178), then
tap [Front video].
2
Start/Stop recording.
･
For information on how to start/stop
recording, see "Recording" (P.189).
❖
Information
･
For using Front video camera, "Video resolution",
"Self-timer", "Geotagging", "Microphone", "Capturing
method", "Data storage" can be set. Other "Video
camera setting" (P.190) are not supported by Front
video camera.
- The settings take over the video settings set at the
time when switching ("Video resolution" is
changed to "VGA").
Adjusting Exposure value
1
On the recording screen, tap ,
then [Exposure value].
2
Tap or drag the bar to adjust the
exposure value.
Recording videos
191
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap and
[Camera].
･
Tap on the photo/video switch
icon (P.178) to display the video
recording screen.
2
On the shooting screen, tap ,
then tap item to set.
･
Several setting icons are displayed on
the shooting screen in advance. The
displayed setting icons change
depending on the setting conditions.
･
For setting items and icons, see "Video
camera setting" (P.190).
3
Tap an option in the selected
setting.
･
If you change setting options, icons
displayed on the shooting screen
change to the set items.
❖
Information
･
On the recording screen, tap to display setting
items. Touch and hold an item and then drag it to the
area where setting item icons are displayed to
replace icons on the recording screen.
･
To delete a setting item icon displayed on the
recording screen, touch and hold an icon and drag it
to displayed in the center of the screen.
･
Capturing mode icons and setting icons (P.178)
cannot be replaced or deleted.
Video camera setting
Changing the recording
settings
Item Icon Description
Scenes
Use Scenes to quickly set up the camera
for various scene conditions.
Off Adjust color shade or
brightness automatically.
Portrait Settings are optimized to
give brighter and warmer
skin tones.
Landscape
Shoot landscape
depicting trees with vivid
color and focusing on
distant objects.
Night Suitable for dark places.
Beach
and snow
Reconstruct beach and
snowy scene brightly and
vividly.
Sports To record fast-moving
object, shorten exposure
time to minimize motion
blurring.
Party Shoot an indoor picture
creating good
atmosphere of indoor
lighting.
192
Applications
Video
resolution
Full HD Full wide HD format with
16:9 aspect ratio.
1920
×
1080 pixels Use
when "Capturing mode" is
set to "Video camera".
HD
720p
HD format with 16:9
aspect ratio.
1280
×
720 pixels Use
when "Capturing mode" is
set to "Video camera".
VGA VGA format with 4:3
aspect ratio.
640
×
480 pixels
QVGA VGA format with 4:3
aspect ratio.
320
×
240 pixels Use when
"Capturing mode" is set to
"Front video camera".
Photo light
Use the photo light to record when
lighting conditions are poor or in
backlight.
On The photo light turns on.
Off The photo light does not
turn on. Sometimes the
video quality can be
better without a photo
light, even if lighting
conditions are poor.
Recording a good video
without using the photo
light requires a steady
hand.
Item Icon Description
Self-timer
Use it to record group videos where
everyone can be in the video.
On
(10 sec.)
Start recording 10
seconds after tapping.
On
(2 sec.)
Start recording 2 seconds
after tapping.
Off Start recording when
tapping.
Focus
mode
Single
autofocus
The camera automatically
focuses on the subject.
Face
detection
P. 1 8 0
Exposure
value
P. 1 8 9
White
balance
The white balance setting adjusts the
color balance according to the light
source.
Auto Adjust the color balance
automatically to the light
source.
Incandescent
Adjust the color balance
for lighting like
incandescent bulb.
Fluorescent
Adjust the color balance
for lighting like
fluorescent.
Daylight Adjust the color balance
for a sunny place.
Cloudy Adjust the color balance
for a cloudy sky or shaded
area.
Item Icon Description
193
Applications
Metering
Measure the brightness on the shooting
screen to determine a well-balanced
exposure automatically.
Center Put emphasis at the
center of the shooting
screen and measure
photometry at whole
view finder to adjust the
exposure.
Average Adjust the exposure
based on the brightness
of the whole shooting
screen.
Spot Measure photometry only
at the center of the
shooting screen to adjust
the exposure.
Image
stabilizer
Compensate for movements of the
camera while recording a video.
On Reduce blur.
Off The stabilizer is not used.
Item Icon Description
Geotagging
Tag videos location information for the
shooting spot.
Enable "Enabling Wireless networks to
find position" (P.209) or "Enabling GPS
function" (P.209) in the location
information service to add Geotag. For
details on location information, see
"Location services" (P.207).
･
Geotag (location information) enables
to specify the shooting spot of the
video.
On Location information is
added to the shot video.
Off Shooting location cannot
be viewed on a map.
Microphone
Select whether to pick up the
surrounding sound when recording
videos.
On Pick up the surrounding
sound when recording
videos.
Off Do not pick up the
surrounding sound when
recording videos.
Capturing
method
Set the shooting method.
On-screen
button
Set to start/stop recording
videos by tapping the
record starting/stopping
icon.
Touch
capture
Set to start/stop recording
by tapping the shooting
screen.
Item Icon Description
194
Applications
❖
Note
･
Some settings cannot be used in combination with
one another.
Photos or videos that you took with the
terminal or multimedia contents (music,
photos, videos, etc.) saved in the internal
storage or microSD card are viewed/played in
"Media Player", "WALKMAN", "Albums", etc.
The terminal can play the following
multimedia contents:
Data
storage
Set the saving location for recorded
videos.
Internal
storage
Save recorded videos in
the internal storage.
SD card Save recorded videos in a
microSD card.
Item Icon Description
Playing multimedia
content
Type File format
Sound
WAV (PCM, G.711) (.wav), AAC (.3gp, .m4a,
.mp4), AAC+ (.3gp, .m4a, .mp4), eAAC+
(.3gp, .m4a, .mp4), MP3 (.mp3), AMR-NB
(.3gp), AMR-WB (.3gp), MIDI (SP-MIDI/GM/
GML (.mid), XMF (.xmf ), Mobile XMF 1.0
(.mxmf ), RTTTL/RTX (.rtttl, .rtx), OTA (.ota),
iMelody (.imy)), Ogg Vorbis (.ogg), FLAC
(.flac), PIFF (.isma)
Still
image
JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg), GIF (.gif ), PNG (.png), BMP
(.bmp), WEBP (.webp)
Video
H263 (.3gp, .mp4), H264 AVC (.3gp, .mp4),
MPEG-4 SP (.3gp), VP8 (.webm, .mkv), Xvid
(.avi), Quicktime (.mov), PIFF (.ismv)
195
Applications
Avoid copyright infringements when you
handle photos, videos, or sound recorded
using the terminal, e.g. copy/edit. In addition,
avoid rights infringements of portraits by
using these photos without consent, altering
them or by other means. Note that capturing
or recording a stage performance,
entertainment or exhibition may be
prohibited even if for personal use.
Please be considerate of the privacy of
individuals around you when taking and
sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
1
Connect the plug of Stereo
Headset with Microphone
(Sample) to headset connector of
the terminal.
･
Check the connecting direction to
connect correctly. Wrong connection
may cause damage.
❖
Information
･
When you listen to Media Player/WALKMAN/FM
radio with Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)
connecting to the terminal, you can switch on/off by
pressing the switch of Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample). However, operation may differ
depending on the conditions of use.
･
When using the supplied 1Seg antenna cable,
connect Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)
with the 1Seg antenna cable, then connect with the
terminal. (P.167)
Copyright protected content Using Stereo Headset with
Microphone
196
Applications
When you do not watch 1Seg, Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample) can be used without the 1Seg
antenna cable.
･
If receiving a call when using Stereo Headset with
Microphone (Sample), music or 1Seg program stops,
and the ringtone sounds.
- If receiving a call when using Media Player, playing
music resumes by tapping the play key on the
Media Player screen after the call ends.
- If receiving a call when using WALKMAN, playing
music resumes when the call ends.
- If receiving a call while watching 1Seg program,
1Seg program restarts by displaying 1Seg screen
after call.
･
If you connect a commercially available earphone
set, sound may not be output depending on the
earphone set.
Images, photos and videos you took can be
viewed and played. Also, use Media Go to
transfer content to the terminal and to take
content from an external device. For details,
refer to "Using microUSB cable" (P.149).
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Album].
･
A list of pictures appears.
❖
Information
･
Depending on the number of saved images, it may
take some times to load images.
Album
Viewing photo/video
197
Applications
■
Album screen
a
Pictures tab
･
Pictures are displayed in a list separated by
months.
b
Maps tab
･
Geotagging images appear on a map.
c
Show album list
d
View optional menu
e
Online tab
･
Images in albums in synchronized online services.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Album].
･
A list of pictures appears.
2
Tap a photo.
･
The photo is played.
･
Tap the screen to display information
such as shooting date, option menu
icons, etc.
■
Still picture viewing screen
a
My location info
（
location information
）
･
For geotagged images, tap to view map.
b
Shooting date and time
c
Back to the image list
d
View share menu
e
Delete image
f
View optional menu
❖
Information
･
appears on an image shot with 3D Sweep
Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle. Tap it to play or pause
the image.
･
Photos shot with 3D Sweep Panorama cannot be
displayed in 3D on the terminal. View them with a 3D
compatible monitor using a microSD card etc.
･
Photos shot with Sweep Multi Angle can be viewed
three-dimensionally by tilting the terminal left and
right.
･
Pinch-out/in on the photo viewing screen to zoom
in/out image.
･
The items vary depending on the selected file.
Viewing photos
a
b
e
c d
b
a
c d e f
198
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Album].
･
A list of pictures appears. icon is
displayed on the video files.
2
Tap a video and tap .
･
Video is played.
Sharing image files
You can share image files by attaching to
Gmail or Email, uploading to Picasa or
Google+, or sending to other devices via
Bluetooth or infrared communication.
1
Tap an image file to share in the
Album screen.
2
Tap the screen and .
･
Menu for sharing image file appears.
･
Tap [See all...] to display all share menus.
3
Select sharing method for image
file.
･
After this step, follow the onscreen
instructions.
･
The items vary depending on the
selected file.
･
Some items cannot be operated in
some image files.
❖
Information
･
On the image file list screen, tap , tap [Select
items], then select image file to operate. You can
operate several files as a group.
Tap [Infrared] to show infrared communication guide.
Tap [OK] to start sending. For details on infrared
communication, see "Using infrared communication"
(P.153).
･
Tap [Play on device] to display the connection device
selection screen (if you do not connect Wi-Fi network
in advance, tap [Settings] to display the setting
screen for Wireless & networks). Select a device
detected on the connection device selection screen,
and tap the device name to play on to share a file
between a DLNA device and the terminal.
･
For shared files, file size and the file type are not
particularly limited, but may be limited by the
application to transfer. DRM content cannot be
shared.
Playing video
Operating image files
199
Applications
Deleting image files
1
On the photo viewing screen/
video playing screen, tap the
screen and tap
u
[OK].
･
Image file is deleted.
❖
Information
･
On the image file list screen, tap , tap [Select
items], then select image file to delete. You can
delete several files as a group.
Using optional menu
View slideshow, edit image, set image to
phonebook entry or as wallpaper, check
shooting date and time, etc.
1
On the photo viewing screen/
video playing screen, tap the
screen and tap .
2
From the displayed menu, select
item you want to use.
･
The items vary depending on the
selected file.
･
Some items cannot be operated in
some image files.
YouTube is a free online video streaming
service. You can play, search for and upload
videos.
･
A packet communication charge is applied
when downloading or uploading video
content using mobile networks.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [YouTube].
･
YouTube video list screen appears.
･
You can tap [BROWSE] to select video
from each category.
2
Tap a video to play it.
･
Tap the screen to display the play
control keys which you can switch Play/
Pause.
･
Double-tap the screen to switch
landscape/portrait.
･
In landscape, drag the marker on the
progress bar at the bottom of the play
screen left or right to change playing
point.
･
Tap
x
to stop playing and return to
the video list screen.
･
To quit YouTube, tap
y
.
YouTub e
Playing YouTube video
200
Applications
❖
Information
･
For movies with caption function which can display
subtitles, "CC" appears on the playback screen in the
landscape mode. Tap [CC] to set the caption
function.
1
While playing a video, double-tap
the screen to switch to the
landscape screen.
2
Tap the screen to display the play
control keys, then tap [HD]/[HQ].
❖
Information
･
A video plays in high quality when Wi-Fi is
connected.
･
On the YouTube screen, tap , then tap
[Settings]
u
[General] then mark [High quality on
mobile] checkbox to always play video in high
quality even when mobile network is connected.
1
Tap .
2
Enter the search keyword.
3
Tap the displayed candidates list
or .
4
Flick the result up and down and
tap a video you want to play.
1
Tap and tap
[Settings]
u
[Search].
2
[Clear search history]
u
Tap [OK].
Playing YouTube videos in high
quality
Searching for a video with
keywords
Deleting search history
201
Applications
This terminal supports MHL connection.
Using commercially available HDMI adapter
etc., you can connect the terminal to an HDMI
compatible TV. Connect to a TV to display
photos and videos on the TV screen.
1
Connect the terminal with the
Home screen or Application screen
displayed to a TV using HDMI
adapter.
■
When the Home screen is displayed
･
Activate TV launcher automatically.
■
When the Applications screen is
displayed
･
, appears on the status bar. Also,
drag the status bar downwards and tap
[TV launcher] to activate TV launcher.
2
Switch TV to HDMI input mode.
･
The screen of the terminal is shown on
the TV screen.
3
Flick an icon left or right to select
application you want to use.
❖
Information
･
While MHL is connected, drag the status bar
downwards and tap [MHL connected] to make
output settings etc.
･
On the TV launcher screen, select an album art in
WALKMAN at the upper left to display WALKMAN
screen.
･
On the TV launcher screen, select [Home] to display
the Home screen of the terminal.
･
On the TV launcher screen, select [Add] or tap
u
[Add] and select the desired shortcut to add to
the TV launcher screen.
･
On the TV launcher screen, tap
u
[Rearrange] to
rearrange shortcuts on the TV launcher screen.
･
On the TV launcher screen, tap
u
[Delete] to
delete shortcuts on the TV launcher screen.
･
Removing the terminal severs connection, however,
TV may remain to HDMI input mode. Follow the
instructions on the TV to switch to digital terrestrial
television mode, etc.
･
When you do not use MHL connection, remove the
HDMI adapter and cancel MHL connection. If the
HDMI cable remains connected, the battery may be
consumed quickly.
Connecting the terminal to
TV to watch photos and
videos
Connecting to TV to activate an
application by TV launcher
202
Applications
Play back videos and music stored on a
microSD card using Media Player.
･
For information on how to copy music and
video data from a PC, see "Using microUSB
cable" (P.149).
･
For information on file formats of playable
data, see "Playing multimedia content" (P.193).
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Media Player].
･
A song list in Media Player appears.
■
Media Player screen.
a
Songs/Artists/Albums tab
･
Switch display setting for song list.
b
View optional menu
c
Movie tab
･
Show a video list.
d
Store tab
･
Activate dmarket.
❖
Information
･
You can change names of "Songs", "Artists" and
"Albums" tabs. To change names, tap and tap
[Settings]
u
Tap [Arrange icons], touch and hold an
icon to change its name then drag to any of [Songs]/
[Artists]/[Albums] then tap [Apply].
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Media Player].
･
A song list appears.
･
Tap [Songs]/[Artists]/[Albums] to
change order of the song list.
･
Tap [Movie] to display video list.
2
Tap a song or video.
･
The playback screen appears to start
playback.
❖
Information
･
If you reset the terminal (P.146), contents protected
by Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.
Media Player
Activating Media Player
a
b
c
d
Playing music/video
203
Applications
■
Music playback screen
a
Back to song list
b
Playback point
･
Appears when album art is tapped.
c
View optional menu
d
Album art
e
Show track information
f
Repeat OFF/Repeat ON/1 track repeat
g
Shuffle OFF/Shuffle ON
h
Go back to the beginning of the track or to the
previous track/Play or pause/Skip to the next track
i
Volume control
･
Alternatively, press
m
during playback to
adjust volume.
■
Video playback screen
a
Back to video list
b
Playback point
c
View optional menu
d
Show video information
e
Auto-rotate screen ON/OFF
･
Tap to turn red and disable Auto-rotate
screen.
f
Go back to the beginning of the video or to the
previous video/Play or pause/Skip to the next video
g
Volume control
･
Alternatively, press
m
during playback to
adjust volume.
❖
Information
･
While in landscape mode, tap the screen to display
option menu icons etc.
a
c
g
e
f
d
i
b
h
b
a
e
e
ef
c
d
g
204
Applications
You can play back songs in the order you
decided using playlist.
Creating a playlist
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Media Player].
･
A song list appears.
2
Tap [Play list].
･
If playlists are not displayed, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Arrange icons], and
then touch and hold [Play list] to drag
to any of [Songs]/[Artists]/[Albums]
then tap [Apply]
3
Tap [Create new] and enter the
access point name and tap [OK].
4
Tap [Add songs to playlist] and
select songs you want to add.
･
You can also select songs from "Artists"
and "Albums".
･
on the selected song turns red and
the song is added to Play list by each
tap.
5
Tap [Apply]
u
[Save]
u
[OK].
Editing songs in playlist
1
Tap [Play list] on the songs screen,
then select a playlist to edit and
tap [Edit].
･
Playlist editing screen appears.
■
Changing order of the songs
Drag up and down in song to change
order and tap [Save]
u
[OK].
■
Deleting songs from playlist
Tap a track to delete and tap [Save]
u
[OK].
Deleting playlist
1
Tap [Play list] and tap [Edit].
2
Tap a playlist you want to delete.
3
Tap [Save]
u
[OK].
･
"Recently added songs", "Recently
played songs", and "Most played songs"
playlists cannot be deleted.
Play list
205
Applications
Timescape
™
(hereinafter referred to as
Timescape) displays various information such
as Facebook, Foursquare, Twitter or mixi
updates, etc. in chronological order. You can
see a tile preview of events before choosing
to view the full content. With (infinite
button), you can view all communication
information related to the registered
contacts.
（
P. 2 0 6
）
❖
Information
･
To make best use of Timescape, you can set up your
social networking service (SNS) account.
･
Note that, you cannot view emails of Gmail or other
Email application accounts in Timescape.
･
If you do not have a Facebook account, you can
create a new account at http://www.facebook.com/.
･
If you do not have a Foursquare account, you can
create a new account at https://foursquare.com/.
･
If you do not have a Twitter account, you can create a
new account at http://www.twitter.com/.
･
If you do not have a mixi account, you can create a
new account at http://mixi.jp/ (in Japanese only).
･
You can check the update of set Facebook,
Foursquare, Twitter or mixi by Timescape.
･
The first time you start Timescape, a setup
wizard will guide you the necessary steps to
set up account.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Timescape
™
].
2
Tap a tile.
3
If you want, enter your Facebook/
Foursquare/Twitter/mixi account
information.
4
Tap [Done].
❖
Information
･
In the setup wizard, tap [Extension search] on the
account registration screen to connect to Google
Play and search new services for Timescape.
･
After completion of setup wizard, you can change
the settings. On the Timescape screen, tap and
tap [Settings]
u
[Set up services].
･
If the automatic update of Facebook/Foursquare/
Twitter/mixi is set, you can check information update
sooner; however, the battery runs out quickly. To
save the battery, set to manual update.
Timescape
™
Setting up Timescape
206
Applications
a
View optional menu
b
Latest comment
･
Display the latest comments posted to Facebook/
Foursquare/Twitter/mixi.
c
Tile
･
Display various information such as Facebook,
Foursquare, Twitter or mixi friends updates in
chronological order.
d
Filter
･
Tap a filter icon to narrow the information down
to a certain type.
･
Display order of filters may differ.
Previewing tiles in Timescape
Select a tile to view the content on the tile.
1
Flick a tile up and left to display a
tile to check.
Displaying tiles by service
Apply filters to narrow tiles to display by
service.
1
Tap the filter icons on the
Timescape screen.
Refreshing the Timescape screen
When you refresh the Timescape screen, the
terminal connects to the Internet to update
information from your Facebook, Foursquare,
Twitter and mixi whose accounts are set in
Timescape.
1
On the Timescape screen, tap
and tap [Refresh].
Timescape screen
b
d
c
a
Filter Icon Displayed tile
All tiles
Updates from your Facebook contacts
Updates from your Foursquare contacts
Updates from your Twitter contacts
Updates from your mixi contacts
207
Applications
Posting to Facebook, Foursquare,
Twitter, mixi from Timescape
1
On the Timescape screen, tap
and tap [Update status].
2
Mark the service you want to post
and tap [Continue].
3
Enter the text and tap [Post].
The following icons on a tile indicate a type of
event.
Displaying detailed information for a
tile
1
Flick a tile up and left to display a
tile to check.
2
Tap a tile.
･
A detailed information screen appears
for the tile.
When you tap a tile, (infinite button) may
appear in the upper right corner. By tapping
, you can view the communication log by
registered information in the contacts or tile
filter event.
Viewing the registered information of
contacts in Timescape
1
On the Timescape screen, tap a
tile.
2
Tap .
･
Communication logs and information
related to the selected tile by event
appear. Flick the filter at the bottom of
the screen to switch displayed
information.
Tile icons
Icon Event
A Facebook update. Tap the tile to
display the update.
A Foursquare update. Tap the tile to
display the update.
A Twitter update. Tap the tile to display
the update.
A mixi update. Tap the tile to display the
update.
The infinite button in
Timescape
208
Applications
Displaying the Timescape setting
screen
1
On the Timescape screen, tap
and tap [Settings].
･
You can set the following operations.
There are two ways to find your location,
using Mobile networks with Wi-Fi (Wireless
network) or GPS. Wireless network
technology determines your position fast but
accuracy may vary. If you use GPS technology
it may take a little longer, but it will find your
exact position. You can enable both Wireless
network and GPS to benefit from both
technologies when trying to find your
position.
The terminal has a GPS receiver that uses
satellite signals to calculate your location.
Some GPS features use the Internet. Data
rates and charges may apply.
When you use functions that require the GPS
receiver to find your location, make sure you
have a clear view of the sky. If the GPS
receiver does not find your location after a
few minutes, you should move to another
location. To help the search, stand still and do
not cover the Xi/GPS/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
antenna (P.22). The first time you use the GPS
it may take up to 10 minutes before your
location is found.
Timescape settings
Update mode
Set your Facebook/Foursquare/
Twitter/mixi account information to
be updated manually/automatically
when Timescape is activated.
Timescape
™
content
Change a content type displayed in
Timescape.
Set up services
Set Facebook/Foursquare/Twitter/
mixi account or search new service
of Timescape.
Location services
GPS function
209
Applications
･
Use the GPS system with great care. DOCOMO
is not liable for any damage caused by
abnormality of the system.
･
Note that DOCOMO shall have no liabilities for
any purely economic loss including those due
to missing a chance to check the
measurement (communication) results
because of external factors (including the
running out of the battery), such as a failure,
malfunction, or any other problems of the
terminal or the power failure.
･
You cannot use the terminal as a navigation
device for an aircraft, vehicle, and person.
Note that DOCOMO shall have no liabilities
whatsoever even if you suffer damage or loss
while performing a navigation using the
location information.
･
You cannot use the terminal as a high-
accuracy measurement GPS. Note that
DOCOMO shall have no liabilities whatsoever
even if you suffer damage or loss due to a
deviation of the location information.
･
The GPS signals cannot be easily received
near a vehicle's sun visor with metal parts.
･
GPS is operated by the U.S. Department of
Defense. The department controls the
accuracy of the system, and manages the
system. Therefore, GPS radio wave condition
may be controlled (degradation of accuracy,
suspension of radio wave transmission, etc.) at
the discretion of the U.S. Department of
Defense.
･
Some wireless communications products
(mobile phone, data detectors and some
others) block satellite signals and also causes
instability of signal reception.
･
Some map displays based on location
information (latitude/longitude information)
may be not accurate due to some countries'
or regions' regulations.
■
Where radio waves are difficult to
receive
Note that radio waves may not be received
or it may be difficult to receive radio waves
in the following conditions, since GPS uses
radio waves from a satellite.
･
Inside or immediately under a building
･
Inside a bag or box
･
Inside or under a thick covering of trees
･
In a car, inside a train compartment
･
When there are obstructions (people or
objects) near the terminal
･
Inside a basement or tunnel, and below
the ground or water
･
In buildings-clustered or residential area
･
Near a high-voltage cable
･
Bad weather such as heavy rain or snow
210
Applications
❖
Note
･
If some of the GPS functions are not available, or if
none of them are, check that your contract includes
the use of the Internet, and see "Wireless & networks"
(P.112).
･
NTT DOCOMO is not liable for navigation services or
for the accuracy of location services.
Enabling GPS function
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap [Location services].
3
Tap [GPS satellites].
4
Read the note and tap [Agree].
･
[GPS satellites] checkbox is marked.
Enabling Wireless networks to find
position
･
Enable to search a current location using
mobile network and Wi-Fi.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap [Location services].
3
Tap [Google's location service].
4
Read the note and tap [Agree].
5
Read the note on location
information and tap [Agree].
･
[Google's location service] checkbox is
marked.
･
Wireless network users' location
information is stored without specifying
who they are. Some location
information is stored even when the
application is not running.
The Google Maps application lets you view
your current location, find other locations
and calculate routes. When you start the
Google Maps application, your approximate
location is shown using information from
nearby mobile towers. Your location is
updated with a more precise position when
the GPS receiver finds your location.
❖
Information
･
Make sure to enable the location information service
setting before trying to get your position.
･
To use Google Maps, enable data connection (LTE/
3G/GPRS) or connect to Wi-Fi.
･
Google Maps does not cover the whole world.
･
Only using LTE/3G/Wi-Fi connection may not detect
some locations.
･
Google may provide updated service or function.
Using Google Maps
211
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap .
2
Tap [Maps].
･
If a message appears, tap [OK].
･
A map screen appears.
Finding the current location on the
map
1
On the map screen, tap .
･
The blinking blue arrow shows the
current location.
･
If you tap , the terminal's
geomagnetic compass links the
direction displayed on the map.
Viewing Street View
･
Street View does not cover some areas.
1
Touch and hold a spot on the map
that you are going to look at in
Street View.
2
Tap the displayed call-out.
3
Tap (Street View)
u
[OK].
･
On the Street View display, tap and
tap [Compass mode]. The compass in
Street View shows the same direction
as the terminal's geomagnetic
compass.
･
Uncovered area for Street View appears
in light gray.
Searching for a location you want to
look at
1
On the map screen, tap .
2
Fill out the search box.
･
You can enter addresses, city names,
business types and institution names
(for example, London and art museum).
･
If a list of places searched or referred
previously appears on the screen, tap
an address, etc. on the list to check the
location on the map.
3
Tap .
･
Search result appears on the map.
･
If "RESULTS LIST" appears, tap [RESULTS
LIST] to select the place to view.
･
When "Did you mean:" appears on the
map, you can tap [Did you mean:] to
select the place to view.
4
Tap a destination.
･
A detailed information screen appears.
❖
Information
･
On the detailed information screen, you can check
the route or phone number for the searched
location. The items displayed vary depending on the
location.
･
On the map screen, tap to select a category such
as "Restaurants", "Cafes" and show it on the map.
212
Applications
Zooming in or out on a map
1
Pinch out or in.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, double-tap the screen to zoom in.
Changing the layers
You can select information to overlay on the
map.
1
On the map screen, tap .
2
Tap the information you want to
view.
･
Traffic information and routes are not
available in all locations.
Receiving guides
Google Maps helps you receive detailed
guides for your destination.
1
On the map screen, tap .
2
Enter a start point in the upper
entry field, and an end point in the
lower entry field.
･
Alternatively, tap at the right of the
text box to select a Start point and End
point from [My current location]/
[Contacts]/[Point on map]/[My Places].
3
Select a transportation from
(Driving)/ (Transit)/
(Walking).
4
Tap [GET DIRECTIONS].
■
Going by car/on foot
Direction is shown on a map.
■
Going by public transport
Trip list appears. Tap a trip to view details.
❖
Information
･
The "Navigation" application is displayed if you tap
. With "Navigation" application, you can use easy
route search with My Location as Start point.
Traffic
Show traffic condition.
Satellite
Display satellite photo.
Terrain
Display geological formation.
Transit Lines
Show route information.
Latitude
Join Latitude.
My Maps
View My Maps that you create on a
PC. Only viewing : You cannot create
My Maps on the terminal.
Wikipedia
Display .
Tap to display a Wikipedia article
related to the location.
213
Applications
Clearing the Maps
Clear displayed layers, route search results
and some others.
1
On the map screen, tap and tap
[Clear Map].
･
If there is nothing to clear, "Clear Map" is
displayed in light gray.
Google Latitude enables you to share
location information with your friends on the
map.
You need to set up a Google account (P.134)
and join Latitude and invite a friend who
gives his or her location information, or to
receive an invitation from him or her.
Joining Latitude
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Latitude].
･
If My Location function is disabled, a
message appears. Tap [Settings], then
enable the function of "Enabling
Wireless networks to find position"
(P.209) or "Enabling GPS function"
(P.209).
2
Tap [MAP VIEW].
❖
Information
･
To set or log out from Latitude, tap on the map
screen, then tap [Settings]
u
[Location settings] to
display a screen for the operation.
･
For details of Latitude, tap on the map screen,
then tap [Help] to view the mobile help.
Checking where a friend is by
Google Latitude
214
Applications
The terminal has a built-in calendar for the
schedule. If you have a Google account, you
can synchronize the terminal's calendar and
web calendar. See "Accounts & sync" (P.134).
･
When you register Google account, tap the
Google account displayed in "Accounts &
sync" and a sync item "Sync Calendar". You
can create schedule etc.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Calendar].
2
Tap [Month]/[Week]/[Day] to
select.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Calendar].
2
Tap at the upper right.
3
Enter a schedule name, date, and
time.
4
If you have two or more calendar
accounts, select one.
5
If necessary, select the repetition
intervals of the calendar.
6
Select the notification intervals of
the schedule.
･
Tap to add a new notification into
the schedule.
7
Enter a place and some others of
schedule.
8
Tap [Save].
❖
Information
･
Tap in "More" and flick the screen to set "Time
zone", "Guests (Email addresses)", "Show me as:", and
"Privacy".
Calendar
Setting the calendar view
Creating a schedule in Calendar
215
Applications
Viewing schedule in Calendar
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Calendar].
･
Flick the calendar left or right to display
the next or previous month/week/day
according to the view mode.
･
Tap to display date and time set on
the terminal.
･
Pinch out/in on the weekly or daily
schedule screen to zoom in/out
calendar.
2
Tap a schedule you want to
display.
❖
Information
･
While the Calendar is displayed, tap and [My
calendars] to synchronize with the docomo account.
You can view the events created in "Schedule"
application in the Calendar.
･
If you log in to Facebook, tap [Sync Calendar] in the
"Facebook inside Xperia
™
" (P.136) to display events
in Facebook in the Calendar.
1
If a reminder icon ( ) appears in
the status bar, drag the bar
downward.
･
The notification panel opens.
･
The reminder icon appears at set
Notification time.
2
Tap a schedule.
3
Tap [Snooze all] or [Dismiss all].
･
If you have any schedules on hold, they
appear on the same screen.
･
If you tap [Snooze all], all the alarms
sound again 5 minutes later.
(Snooze is a function that sounds the
alarm some time later even though you
stop it.)
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Calendar].
2
Tap and [Search].
3
Enter a keyword in the search box
and tap .
･
Search results appear. Tap an event to
view details.
Releasing the reminder of a
schedule or setting the snooze
Searching events in Calendar
216
Applications
Set Calendar view, reminder notifications,
ringtone, vibration, reminder time.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Calendar].
2
Tap and tap [Settings].
3
Select an item to change.
With "Alarm & clock" application, you can set
an alarm and use world clock, stopwatch and
timer.
1
From the Home screen, tap .
2
Tap [Alarm & clock].
a
Clock display
･
Tap to view date and time (P.146) setting screen.
b
Add alarm
c
Alarms set
d
Display clock in full screen
e
View alarm screen
f
View world clock
g
View stop watch
h
View timer
i
Delete set alarm
Changing calendar settings
Alarm & clock
a
d
b
c
e
i
f g h
217
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then [Alarm & clock].
･
The alarm list screen appears.
2
Tap [Add alarm].
･
An alarm setting screen appears. You
can set the following items.
･
Tap [Advanced alarm settings] to view
all setting items.
3
Tap [Done].
･
Return to the alarms list screen.
❖
Information
･
To switch on/off alarm, from the alarm list screen, tap
or touch and hold an alarm that is set, then tap
[Turn alarm on]/[Turn alarm off ].
･
When an alarm is turned on, the line under lights
blue.
Deleting the alarm
1
On the alarm list screen, tap
and mark alarm to delete.
2
Tap [Delete]
u
[Yes].
･
The number of marked alarms appears
on the "Delete" button.
❖
Information
･
Alternatively, on the alarm list screen, touch and hold
an alarm you want to delete, then tap [Delete
alarm]
u
[Yes] to delete the alarm.
Setting alarm
Time
Set time.
Repeat
Set a day of the week for the alarm.
Alarm sound
Set alarm sound.
Snooze
duration
Set time interval to sound the
ringtone again after stopping the
ringtone.
Alarm text
Enter texts that appear while alarm
is sounding.
Style settings
Mark the checkbox to display an
image while alarm is sounding.
Vibrate
Mark to vibrate at the alarm time.
Alarm volume
Drag the slider left or right to adjust
the level.
Alarm in silent
mode
Mark to sound alarm even in silent
mode.
Side keys
behavior
Select an effect when pressing
m
while alarm is sounding.
Auto silent time
Set time interval until alarm
automatically stops.
218
Applications
Stopping an alarm while the alarm is
sounding
1
While alarm is sounding, touch
and hold and drag it to the
right.
❖
Information
･
If you tap [Snooze], the alarm sounds again when the
time set in "Snooze duration" (P.216) has passed.
Display the date and time in cities around the
world.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then [Alarm & clock].
2
Tap [World clock].
･
The list screen of the world clock
appears.
3
Tap [Add city].
4
Select a city.
❖
Information
･
Tap to display date and time set on the terminal
in full screen.
･
Add a city and tap , then flick the list of added
cities left and right to check date and time
corresponding to the terminal's settings.
Changing World clock
You can switch, sort or delete Celsius/
Fahrenheit displayed on World clock.
1
On the world clock list screen, tap
.
■
Setting home city
Tap [Set home city] and select a city.
■
Switching Celsius/Fahrenheit
Tap [Celsius]/[Fahrenheit].
･
Switch Celsius/Fahrenheit.
■
Sorting
Tap [Rearrange]
u
Drag of the date in
the world clock up and down
u
Tap
[Done].
■
Deleting
Tap [Delete]
u
Mark world clock checkbox
you want to delete
u
Tap [Delete]
u
[Yes].
･
The number of marked cities appears
on the [Delete] button.
･
Alternatively, on the world clock list
screen, touch and hold a city you want
to delete, then tap [Delete city]
u
[Yes]
to delete.
Using World clock
219
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then [Alarm & clock].
2
Tap [Stopwatch].
3
Tap [Start].
･
Measurement starts and appears in
the status bar.
･
Tap [Lap] to measure elapsed time.
4
Tap [Stop].
･
Tap [Start] to resume measuring.
･
Tap [Reset] to delete measured time
and lap time.
❖
Information
･
Tap to display date and time set on the terminal
in full screen.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then [Alarm & clock].
2
Tap [Timer].
･
Time screen appears.
3
Tap [Set time].
4
Flick number up and down to
adjust the time and then tap [Set].
5
Tap [Start].
･
Timer starts, and appears in the
status bar.
6
Tap [Stop].
･
Stop sounding alarm after a set time
has elapsed.
･
Tap [Stop] within a set time duration to
pause timer. Tap [Start] to resume timer.
❖
Information
･
Tap to display date and time set on the terminal
in full screen.
･
Tap to set time from Timer history.
･
Tap
u
Select an alarm sound
u
Tap [Done] to
change the alarm sound.
Using Stopwatch Using Timer
220
Applications
Move or back up data such as phonebook
entries, sp-mode mails, bookmarks, etc. using
external memory such as microSD card.
･
Do not remove the battery pack or microUSB
card during backup or restoring. Doing so
may damage the terminal data.
･
If the battery is low, backup or restore may not
be done. In that case, charge the terminal and
retry to back up or restore.
･
docomo apps password is required to back
up or restore. For details on docomo apps
password, see "docomo apps password"
(P.134).
❖
Information
･
For details of SD card backup, tap , then tap [Help]
to view the help.
If microSD card is not installed, data such as
images and movies are saved to the internal
storage. You can back up only data such as
images and movies stored in the internal
storage. Data stored in microSD card cannot
be backed up.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [SD card backup].
･
When you use for the first time, agree to
"License agreement".
2
Tap [Back up].
3
Mark checkboxes for data to back
up.
･
Tap [Select all] to mark all checkboxes.
4
Tap [Start backup]
u
[OK].
5
Enter docomo apps password and
tap [OK].
･
Data is backed up in a microSD card.
SD card backup
Backing up
221
Applications
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [SD card backup].
･
When you use for the first time, agree to
"License agreement".
2
Tap [Restore].
3
Tap [Select] on data type, mark
checkboxes for data to restore,
and tap [Select].
･
Tap [Select latest data] to select the
latest data for each data type.
4
Tap [Add]/[Overwrite] to select
restore method and tap [Start
restore]
u
[OK].
5
Enter docomo apps password and
tap [OK].
･
Backed up data is restored.
You can copy contacts data registered in
Google account and in the terminal to
docomo account.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [SD card backup].
･
When you use for the first time, agree to
"License agreement".
2
Tap [Phonebook account copy],
tap [Select] on phonebook
contacts you want to copy.
3
Tap [Overwrite]/[Add].
･
Phonebook data is copied to docomo
account.
❖
Information
･
If phonebook item names (e.g. Phone number, etc.)
of the other terminal are different from ones of your
terminal, the item names may be changed or
deleted. Also, some text may be deleted in copied
destination, because savable characters in a
phonebook entry vary by terminal.
･
When backing up phonebook entries to microSD
card, data without Name cannot be copied.
･
If microSD card is low on memory, backup may not
be done. In that case, delete unnecessary files to
make available space.
Restoring Copying phonebook entries
registered in Google account to
docomo account
222
Applications
With OfficeSuite, you can view files of Word,
Excel, etc. from the terminal or a microSD
card.
❖
Information
･
Some files may not be viewed properly due to
corrupted layouts.
1
From the Home screen, tap .
2
Tap [OfficeSuite].
･
OfficeSuite starts.
❖
Information
･
When you activate for the first time, a screen for
register name etc. appears. Select [Register later] or
[Register now].
OfficeSuite
Starting OfficeSuite
223
International roaming
International roaming
With the international roaming (WORLD
WING), you can use the terminal without
changing phone number or mail address in
the service area of the overseas network
operator affiliated with DOCOMO. You do not
need to change the settings of call and SMS.
■
Supporting networks
The terminal is Class 4. The terminal works in
a 3G roaming area and GSM/GPRS service
area. Services are also available in countries
and areas supporting 3G 850MHz/GSM
850MHz. Check available areas. Use 3G
network or GSM/GPRS network overseas
because Xi is not available overseas.
■
Before using the terminal overseas,
refer to the followings.
･
"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International
Services]"
･
DOCOMO International Services website
❖
Information
･
For Country codes, International call access codes,
Universal number international prefix, supported
countries/areas and network operators, refer to
"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"
or DOCOMO International Services Website.
* To use data communication during roaming, mark
[Data roaming] checkbox in Mobile network settings.
(P.226)
❖
Information
･
Some services are not available depending on the
overseas network operator or network.
Overview of International
roaming (WORLD WING)
Available Services
Main communication
services 3G 3G850 GSM
(GPRS)
Phone
○○○
Message (SMS)
○○○
Email
*
○○○
Browser
*
○○○
224
International roaming
To use the terminal overseas, check the
following in Japan.
■
Subscription
･
Check if you subscribe WORLD WING. For
details, contact "General Inquiries" on the
last page of this manual.
■
Charging
･
For AC adapter for charging overseas
travel, use AC Adapter 03 (optional).
■
Usage charge
･
Overseas usage charges (call and packet
communication) differ from those in
Japan.
･
Some applications automatically perform
packet communications. Your packet
communication charges may be higher.
For operation details of each application,
please contact the application provider.
Network service settings
If you subscribe to network services, you can
use network services such as Voice Mail
Service, Call Forwarding Service, Caller ID
Notification Service, etc., even overseas.
However, some network services cannot be
used.
･
To use network services overseas, you need to
set "Remote access" to activate. You can set
"Remote access" in the country you stay.
(P.230)
･
Even if the setting/canceling operation is
available, some network services cannot be
used depending on overseas network
operators.
Before using
Before leaving Japan
Advance preparation
225
International roaming
When you arrive overseas and turn on the
terminal, an available network is
automatically set.
Connectivity
When you have set search mode of "Available
networks" to "Automatic" in "Service
providers" settings, optimized network is
automatically selected.
When you connect to the network operator
conducted in flat-rate service, you can use
the service with flat-rate packet
communication charges overseas up to the
specified upper limit per day. To use this
service, subscription of packet flat-rate
service in Japan is required. For details, refer
to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [International
Services]" or DOCOMO International Services
Website.
Display
During international roaming, appears on
the status bar.
･
You can confirm the name of the connected
network operator on the Notification panel.
❖
Note
･
While appears on the status bar, packet
communication is available. Note that packet
communication fee may become high.
Date & time settings
When "Automatic date & time", "Automatic
time zone" in "Date & time" are marked, the
date, time and time differences of the
terminal clock are corrected by receiving the
information related to time and time
differences from the network of overseas
network operator you connect to.
･
Correction of the time/time differences may
not be performed correctly depending on the
network of overseas network operator. In that
case, set time zone manually.
･
Timing of correction varies by the overseas
network operator.
･
Date & time (P.146)
About inquiries
･
For loss or theft of the terminal or UIM/
docomo mini UIM card, immediately contact
DOCOMO from the spot to take the necessary
steps for suspending the use. For inquiries, see
the last page of this manual. Note that you are
still liable for the call and communication
charge incurred after the loss or theft
occurred.
･
For using from land-line phone, entering
"International call access code" or "Universal
number international prefix" for the country is
needed.
After arriving overseas
226
International roaming
After returning to Japan
When you return to Japan, the terminal is
connected to DOCOMO network
automatically. If connection is failed, perform
the following operations.
･
Set "Network Mode" to "LTE (preferred)/
WCDMA/GSM". (P.226)
･
Set "Search mode" to "Automatic" in "Service
providers" settings. (P.225)
When you start the international roaming or
move out of your operator's network, you
need to reconnect the terminal to another
available network.
❖
Information
･
Some applications automatically perform packet
communications. To disconnect packet
communication manually, from the Home screen,
tap and Tap [Settings]
u
[More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Data enabled] to unmark.
Confirming and switching the
network search mode
By default, network search mode is set to
"Automatic". When you connect manually to
an overseas network operator conducted in
flat-rate service, confirm the search mode
with the following operations and switch to
"Manual".
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Service
providers].
3
Tap [Search mode]
u
[Manual].
4
From "AVAILABLE NETWORKS",
tap a network to mark.
･
To display available networks, tap
[Search networks].
❖
Information
･
If you set a network manually, the terminal is not
reconnected to another network automatically even
if you move out of the network area.
･
To return to "Automatic", tap [Automatic] in
Step 3.
Making setting for
international use
227
International roaming
Changing network mode settings
You can change network mode settings
according to the network mode
(communication method) adopted by the
overseas network operator.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap [More...]
u
[Mobile
networks]
u
[Network Mode].
3
Select a network mode you use.
･
You can select from [LTE/WCDMA],
[GSM only] and [LTE (preferred)/
WCDMA/GSM]. If you select [LTE
(preferred)/WCDMA/GSM] to switch
available network automatically.
Activating data roaming
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Settings].
2
Tap [More...]
u
[Mobile networks].
3
Tap [Data roaming].
4
Read the cautions displayed, tap
[Yes].
･
[Data roaming] checkbox is marked.
When you arrive overseas and turn on the
terminal, an available network is
automatically set.
･
Check that the battery and signal levels are
high enough.
･
Depending on the network operator, even if
the Caller ID notification is active, the caller ID
may not be notified or appear properly.
In this case, calls cannot be made from the call
log.
You can make a call from overseas using the
international roaming service.
･
You can easily make international calls from
the country you stay to Japan or to other
countries by entering prefix "+" and then the
country code and phone number.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial].
Making/Receiving calls in
the country you stay
Making a call to outside
country you stay (including
Japan)
228
International roaming
2
Dial + (touch and hold
[0])
u
Country code
u
Area code
(City code)
u
Enter a phone
number.
･
If the area code begins with "0", omit "0".
However, "0" may be required to dial to
some country or area such as Italy.
･
To call an overseas "WORLD WING" user,
enter "81" (Japan) for the country code.
3
Tap .
❖
Information
･
During international roaming, if you make an
international call to Japan using DOCOMO's
phonebook application, the "International dialing
assist" screen appears. You can make a call without
entering country code from that screen.
You can make a call by entering the phone
number of the other party's land-line phone
or mobile phone in the same way you do in
Japan.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Dial].
2
Enter the other party's phone
number.
･
To make a call to land-line phone, enter
the area code (city code) + other party's
phone number.
3
Tap .
When the other party uses international
roaming service, make a call as an
international call to Japan even when you
stay in the same country as the other party.
You can receive a call using the international
roaming service.
Making a call within the
country you stay
Making a call to WORLD WING
user overseas
Receiving a call in the country
you stay
229
International roaming
1
While receiving a call, touch and
hold (left) and drag it to
(right).
2
When the conversation is finished,
tap [End call].
❖
Information
･
When you received a call during the international
roaming, regardless of which country the call is from,
it is forwarded internationally from Japan. A caller is
charged for a call fee to Japan, and the receiver is
charged for a reception fee.
■
Having the other party call you
･
Calling from Japan to the country you stay
To have the other party make a call from a
land-line phone or mobile phone in Japan
to the terminal in the country you stay,
the other party only needs to dial the
phone number as in Japan.
･
Calling from the country except Japan to
the country you stay
You have to receive a call through Japan
no matter where you are; therefore, the
other party needs to enter the
international call access code and "81"
(Country code of Japan).
International access code - 81 - 90 (or 80)
- XXXX - XXXX
Make settings for using international
roaming or international calls.
Set restricting incoming calls overseas or
using roaming guidance.
･
For some overseas network operators,
settings may not be made.
Restricting incoming calls for
roaming
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Roaming
settings].
3
Tap [Restricting incoming calls].
･
Select items you want to use.
International roaming
settings
Settings for making/receiving
calls overseas
Activate
restricting
Tap any of [Restricting all incomings]/
[Restricting incoming of video call/
64K data], enter the network security
code, and tap [OK].
Deactivate
restricting
Enter the network security code and
tap [OK].
Check settings
Check the current service settings.
230
International roaming
Setting incoming notification on
roaming
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Roaming
settings].
3
Tap [Incoming notification on
roaming].
･
Select items you want to use.
Setting roaming guidance
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Roaming
settings].
3
Tap [Roaming guidance].
･
Select items you want to use.
Setting international dial assistance
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Roaming
settings].
3
Tap [International dial assist].
･
Select items you want to use.
Settings Network service (overseas)
Set network service such as voice mail from
overseas.
･
If you make the settings overseas, you are
charged a call fee to Japan from the country
you stay.
･
For some overseas network operators,
settings may not be made.
Activate incoming
call notification
Tap [OK] to activate roaming
incoming call notification.
Deactiv. incoming
call notification
Tap [OK] to deactivate roaming
incoming call notification.
Check settings
Check the current service
settings.
Activate roaming
guidance
Tap [OK] to activate roaming
guidance.
Deactivate
roaming guidance
Tap [OK] to deactivate roaming
guidance.
Check settings
Check the current service
settings.
Auto conversion
Mark the checkbox to add
international prefix or country
code automatically.
Country code
Tap [OK] to select a country code
which will be used for auto
conversion.
International
prefix
Tap [OK] to select an
international prefix which will be
used for auto conversion.
231
International roaming
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap .
2
Tap [Call settings]
u
[Roaming
settings].
3
Tap [Network service].
･
Select items you want to use. You need
to set "Remote access" to activate.
* Follow the voice prompts to operate.
Voicemail
(charged)
Activate
Voicemail
(roaming)
Tap [OK ].
*
Deactivate
Voicemail
(roaming)
Tap [OK ].
*
Play
Voicemail
message
(roaming)
Tap [OK]. After this step,
follow the voice prompts
to play the message.
Voicemail
settings
(roaming)
Tap [OK ].
*
Voicemail
ring time
(roaming)
Tap [OK ].
*
Incoming call notific.
(charged)
Tap [OK ].
*
Caller ID request
(charged)
Tap [OK ].
*
Roaming guidance
(charged)
Tap [OK ].
*
Remote operation
(charged)
Tap [OK ].
*
Call
forwarding
(charged)
Activate call
forwarding
Tap [OK ].
*
Deactivate
call
forwarding
Tap [OK ].
*
Check
settings
Tap [OK ].
*
232
Appendix/Index
Appendix/Index
A variety of commercially available optional
devices allows you to expand the terminal's
capabilities by supporting a wide range of
purpose, including personal and business
uses.
Some accessories are only available in some
areas.
For details, please contact a sales outlet such
as docomo Shop.
For details on optional devices, see the user's
manual of each device.
･
Back Cover SO20
･
Battery Pack SO06
･
1Seg antenna cable SO01
･
Carry Case 02
･
Pocket charger 01/02
･
AC Adapter cable SO03
･
AC Adapter 03
･
DC Adapter 03
･
AC Adapter Converter Plug Type C 01
･
Micro USB Cable 01
･
Wireless Earphone Set 03
･
First, check if the software update is necessary
for the terminal. If necessary, perform the
software update (P.240).
･
When checking the following items not to
improve the state, contact the phone number
given in "Repairs" the last page of this manual
(in Japanese only) or DOCOMO-specified
repair office.
■
Power supply
■
Charging
Optional and related
devices
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Cannot power on the terminal.
･
Is the battery pack installed correctly? P.25
･
Check if the battery pack is not run out. P.26
Cannot charge the terminal.
(The notification LED does not turn on, or the icon
that means charging does not appear.)
･
Is the battery pack installed correctly? P.25
･
Check if the adapter's power plug or
cigarette lighter plug is correctly
inserted to an outlet or cigarette lighter
socket.
P. 2 8
･
Check if the adapter cable and the
terminal are set correctly.
P. 2 8
233
Appendix/Index
■
Terminal operation
･
If you execute calls, communications or
other function operations for a long time
while charging, the terminal may
become hot and the battery status icon
may not indicate charging (charging
stops) or charging may not be
completed. In this case, wait until the
temperature of the terminal drops and
charge again.
−
The notification LED blinks in red and cannot
operate the terminal.
･
When the battery level is low, charge the
battery.
P. 2 6
Become hot while operating/charging.
･
While calling, depending on the radio
wave condition or call duration time, the
terminal may become hot. This
condition is not abnormal.
−
･
While operating or charging, or if you
watch 1Seg, record video etc. for a long
time while charging the battery, the
terminal, battery pack and adapter may
become hot. There is no problem about
safety and continue to use it.
−
The operation time provided by the battery pack is
short.
･
Is your terminal left for a long time under
the state of out of service area?
Out of service area, more power is
consumed to search available radio
waves.
−
･
The operating time of the battery pack
varies depending on the operating
environment and the degradation level
of the battery pack.
P. 2 7
･
Battery pack is a consumable accessory.
The usage duration of the battery per
one charge decreases gradually each
time the battery is recharged.
If the operation time is too short with
fully charged state, purchase a new
battery pack of the specified type.
−
Turning the power off or restarting automatically
happens.
･
If the terminals of battery pack are dirty,
the contact may become poor and the
power may shut OFF. Clean the terminals
of the battery pack with a dry cotton
swab etc. if they are dirty.
−
No operations are performed even by pressing the
keys on the terminal.
･
Check if you activate the screen lock. P.142
The screen reacts slowly when a button is pressed.
･
When large amount of data is saved in
the terminal or transferring large-size
data between the terminal and microSD
card, the reactions on the screen may be
delayed.
−
The docomo mini UIM card is not recognized.
･
Check if the docomo mini UIM card is
attached in the right direction.
P. 2 3
234
Appendix/Index
■
Phone call
The clock is not on time.
･
The clock time may become wrong
while turning on the power for a long
time. Check if "Automatic date & time" is
set to on and turn the power off and on
in a place with strong radio wave
conditions.
P. 1 4 6
The terminal operation is unstable.
･
Instability may be caused by
applications that you installed after
purchasing the terminal. If the symptom
is improved when you boot the terminal
in safe mode (near default state),
uninstalling the installed application
may improve the symptom.
To boot the terminal in safe mode, press
and hold
p
for over a second with
the terminal OFF until XPERIA logo
appears, and then touch and hold
m
at the bottom until the terminal
vibrates once. When safe mode is
booted, "Safe mode" is displayed at the
lower left of the screen.
To exit the safe mode, turn power OFF
and then ON.
* Back up the necessary data before
using safe mode.
* Some widgets that you created may
be removed.
* Safe mode is not a normal booting
state. To use ordinarily, exit the safe
mode.
−
Applications cannot be operated properly
(applications cannot be activated, or errors occur
frequently).
･
Are there any applications being
disabled? Enable disabled applications,
then retry.
P. 1 3 3
Cannot make a call even if you press the dial button.
･
Check if you activate the SIM card lock. P.141
･
Check if you activate Airplane mode. P.118
The ringtone does not sound.
･
Is the call alert volume of volume setting
set to silent?
P. 1 2 5
･
Check if the silent mode is active. P.126
･
Is the ring time for Voice Mail service or
Call Forwarding Service "0 Sec."?
P. 8 4
Calls are not connected.
(Even when moving "
圏外
(out of service area)" does
not disappear, or although radio waves are enough,
making/receiving calls is unavailable.)
･
Turn the power OFF and ON, or remove
and attach docomo mini UIM card.
P. 2 3
P. 2 5
P. 3 0
･
Due to the nature of radio waves,
making/receiving calls may be
unavailable even when "not out of
service area" or " appears on the
display for the radio wave condition".
Move to the other place and call again.
−
235
Appendix/Index
■
Display
■
Sound
■
Display data
■
Camera
■
1Seg
■
Osaifu-Keitai
･
Due to the crossing of radio waves, at
the crowded public places, calls/mails
are crossed and the connection status
may not be good. Move to other place or
call again at other time.
−
The display is dim.
･
Check if the backlight time-out is set. P.127
･
Check if the brightness of screen is
changed.
P. 1 2 7
･
Check if you activate eco
モード
(eco
mode).
P. 7 2
･
Check if you cover the Proximity sensor
with sticker etc.
P. 2 2
･
When the temperature of the terminal
becomes high while using, the display
may become darker. It is not abnormal.
−
During a voice call, the distant party's voice is hard
to listen to or too loud.
･
Check if the listening volume of the
sound volume setting is changed.
P. 8 1
Images or ringtones set in each feature do not work
and the terminal operates in the default data.
･
Is the inserted docomo mini UIM card
the same one that is set when the
images or ringtones are obtained?
−
Still images and video taken with the camera are
blurred.
･
Check if clouds or dirt attach to the lens
of camera.
−
･
To shoot a portrait image, use the face
detection function.
P. 1 8 0
･
Shoot using shake reducing function. P.187
P. 1 9 2
Watching 1Seg is unavailable.
･
Are you out of terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting service area or in a place
where airwave is weak?
−
･
Is channel set? P.168
Cannot hear sound.
･
Is Stereo Headset with Microphone
(Sample) removed from 1Seg antenna
cable when watching 1Seg using the
Stereo Headset with Microphone
(Sample)?
P. 1 6 8
Osaifu-Keitai function is unavailable.
･
When removing the battery pack,
Osaifu-Keitai functions are unavailable
regardless of the Osaifu-Keitai lock
settings.
−
･
Is Osaifu-Keitai lock activated? P.165
･
Do you place mark of the terminal
over an IC card reader?
P. 1 6 4
236
Appendix/Index
■
International roaming
■
Data management
Cannot use the terminal overseas.
■
When antenna mark is displayed
･
Do you subscribe WORLD WING?
Check if you subscribe WORLD WING.
−
■
Out of service area indicator appears
･
Check if you are out of the international
roaming service area or in an area with
poor signal strength. Check if the service
area and network operator are available,
referring to "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[International Services]" or DOCOMO
International Services website.
･
Change the network settings or overseas
network operator settings.
Set "Search mode" to "Automatic" in
"Service providers" settings.
Set "Network Mode" to "LTE (preferred)/
WCDMA/GSM".
･
Turning off the terminal and then
turning on again may work for the
restoration.
P. 2 2 4
P. 2 2 5
P. 2 2 6
P. 3 0
Cannot perform data communication overseas.
･
Mark the data roaming checkbox. P.226
The terminal suddenly became unavailable while
using overseas.
･
Check if usage amount exceeds the limit
of maximum charges for use.
For use of "International roaming
(WORLD WING)", the limit of maximum
charges for use is set in advance. If
exceeding the limit of maximum charges
for use, pay the charges.
−
Cannot receive calls overseas.
･
Is "Restricting incoming calls" set to
"Activate restricting"?
P. 2 2 8
No caller ID is notified/A notified caller ID is
different from that of the caller/Functions for using
contents saved in phonebook or those using Caller
ID notification do not operate.
･
Even if a caller notifies its caller ID, it is
not displayed on the terminal unless the
network or network operator notifies it.
And a different caller ID may be notified
depending on the network or network
operator you use.
−
Data transfer is not performed.
･
Check if USB hub is used. If you use USB
hub, operations may not be performed
correctly.
−
Data saved in microSD card is not displayed.
･
Remove the microSD card and insert it
again.
P. 2 4
When trying to display an image, "
×
" appears
instead of it.
Or "
×
" appears for the demo play or the preview
function.
･
"
×
" may appear instead of destroyed
image data.
−
237
Appendix/Index
■
Bluetooth function
No service
･
The terminal is out of service area, or the
received signal is too weak. Move to a location
where radio signal can be reached.
･
The docomo mini UIM card is not working
properly.
Insert the docomo mini UIM card in another
terminal. If this works, it is probably the
terminal that is causing the problem. In this
case, contact "Repairs" on the last page of this
manual (in Japanese only).
Removing and inserting docomo mini UIM
card may improve the problem.
SIM card is locked
Enter your PIN code (P.140) correctly.
SIM card is PUK-locked
Enter your PUK (Personal Unblocking Key)
(P.141) correctly.
The phone storage is full
There is no memory space. Delete
unnecessary applications (P.132) to obtain
memory space.
The terminal cannot be connected to a Bluetooth
communication device/A Bluetooth
communication device cannot be found from the
terminal.
･
Make Bluetooth communication device
(commercial item) registering stand-by
state and then register the device on the
terminal. If you delete already registered
device and register the device again as a
new device, delete the registrations on
both Bluetooth communication device
(commercial item) and the terminal and
then perform registration of the devices.
P. 1 5 7
Calls cannot be made from the terminal connecting
to external device such as car navigation or
handsfree device.
･
If calls are made several times when the
other party does not answer or is out of
service, the call to this number may be
disabled. In this case, turn terminal off
and on.
−
Error messages
238
Appendix/Index
By sharing screens of your terminal with NTT
DOCOMO, you can receive technical support
to make settings (in Japanese only).
･
This service is not available when your
docomo mini UIM card is not inserted, during
international roaming, or in Airplane mode.
･
Smartphone Anshin Remote Support is a
service requiring subscription.
･
Some operations and settings are not
supported.
･
For details on Smartphone Anshin Remote
Support, refer to NTT DOCOMO website.
1
Call
スマートフォン遠隔サポートセン
ター
(Remote support center for
smartphone) ( 0120-783-360,
Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 8:00
p.m., open all year round).
2
Tap [
遠隔サポート
(Remote
support)].
･
When you use for the first time, agree to
"
ソフトウェア使用許諾書
(License
Agreement)".
3
Enter connection number notified
by DOCOMO.
4
Remote support starts when you
are connected.
･
Make sure that the warranty is received with
the terminal upon purchase. Check to be sure
that "
販売店名・お買い上げ日
(the name of the
retailer, date of purchase)", and other items
have been filled out on the warranty before
storing it in a safe place. If any necessary
information is not provided, immediately
contact the retailer and request to complete
the warranty. The terminal comes with a year's
free warranty starting from the date of
purchase.
･
Specifications of this product and its
accessories are subject to change for
improvement without prior notice.
･
Data saved in the Contacts etc. may be
changed/lost due to the trouble/repairs or
handling of the terminal. DOCOMO
recommends making a copy of the
Phonebook data etc., in case.
* You can save Phonebook data in a microSD
card inserted to the terminal.
* Data such as phonebook entries can be
backed up to Data center using Data Security
Service (subscription is required).
Smartphone Anshin
Remote Support
Warranty and After Sales
Services
Warranty
239
Appendix/Index
If you have problems with the
terminal
Before asking repair, see "Troubleshooting"
(P.231) in this manual to check the problem. If
the problem still persists, contact "Repairs"
on the last page of this manual (in Japanese
only).
If repair is required resultingly
Bring the terminal to the DOCOMO-specified
repair office. However, it must be taken
during business hours of the repair office.
Make sure to bring a warranty card with the
product when you visit the shop. Note that
repair may take some days depending on the
problem.
■
Within the warranty period
･
We repair the terminal free of charge
based on the terms documented in the
warranty.
･
When requesting a repair, make sure to
bring the warranty card with the terminal.
Repair requests that are not accompanied
by the warranty or that involve
malfunction and damage due to incorrect
handling by the owner (damage of liquid
crystal, connector, etc.) will only be
repaired at the owner's expense, even if
the warranty period is still effective.
･
Malfunction due to use of devices and
consumable parts other than those
specified by DOCOMO will only be
repaired at the owner's expense, even if
the warranty period is still effective.
■
Note that repair may be refused in the
following cases:
･
When the terminal has corrosion due to
wet by liquid, condensation, perspiration,
etc. or the internal circuit board is
damaged or deformed (we may not be
able to repair when the microUSB
connector, headset connecting jack,
liquid crystal, etc. is damaged or the frame
itself is cracked) based on the result of our
examination.
- Even if repair is possible, it will be done
at the owner's expense, as this type of
corrosion or damage is not covered by
the warranty.
■
If the warranty period expires
We will repair the terminal at the owner's
expense.
After Sales Services
240
Appendix/Index
■
Parts stock period
The functional parts necessary to repair the
terminal will be basically available for a
minimum of six years after the manufacture
is discontinued.
However, depending on the defective
portion, repair may not be possible because
of a shortage of repair parts. Note that repair
may still be possible depending on the
defective portion even if the stock period
has expired. Contact "Repairs" on the last
page of this manual (in Japanese only).
Precautions
●
Never modify the terminal or accessories.
･
Doing so may result in fire, injuries or
malfunctions.
･
The modified terminal may be repaired
only if the owner agrees on that all the
modified parts are restored to the original
conditions.
However, repairs may be refused
depending on the modifications.
The following cases may be considered as
modifications.
- Put a seal etc. on the liquid crystal or
keypad.
- Glued decorations on the terminal using
adhesion bond, etc.
- Change the parts such as exterior to
other than DOCOMO standard parts.
･
Malfunction and damage due to
modifications will be repaired at the
owner's expense, even if the warranty
period is still effective.
●
The model plate must not be removed
from the terminal.
The model plate certifies that the terminal
satisfies technical standards. It should be
noted that if the plate is removed or is
replaced with a different plate, and the
original model plate cannot be verified, it
may disqualify the unit from repairs due to
not being able to determine the technical
standards of that particular phone.
●
Note that the settings and other
information may be reset (cleared) as a
result of malfunction, repair or other
handling. In this case, make the settings
again.
●
After the repair, Wi-Fi MAC address or
Bluetooth address may be changed
regardless of the repaired parts.
●
A material that generates a magnetic field
is used in the following parts of the
terminal.
Do not hold an object that is easily
affected by magnetism, such as a cash
card, close to the terminal. You may not
be able to use the card any more.
Where it is used: Speaker, earpiece
241
Appendix/Index
●
If inside of the terminal gets wet or moist,
turn the power off, remove the battery
pack immediately, and bring the terminal
to a repair office as soon as possible.
However, repair may not be possible
depending on the condition of the
terminal.
Precautions on memory dial
(Phonebook function) and
downloaded data
Note that data you created or data you
retrieved or downloaded from sources other
than your terminal may be changed or lost
when you change the model or have repairs
done to the terminal. DOCOMO shall have no
liability for any change or loss of any kind.
Under some circumstances, DOCOMO may
replace your terminal with its equivalent
instead of repairing it.
You can update the terminal to the most
recent software for optimal performance and
to get the latest enhancements.
❖
Note
･
When the terminal is connected to the Internet using
the mobile network connection, data
communication fee is applied.
･
Make sure you back up and save all data contained in
the terminal before you start updating the terminal.
･
For the first time activating the terminal after
software update, the operation may be slower from
several minutes to several ten minutes due to data
update. The required time varies by the data in the
terminal. Do not turn the power off until usual
operation speed comebacks.
❖
Information
･
For details, refer to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/
support/ (in Japanese only).
Setting notification of Software
update
You can set to be notified of updating
software.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Update Center].
2
Tap and [Settings].
Updating software
242
Appendix/Index
3
Mark [Notifications] checkbox.
･
To change the notification tone, tap
[Notification tone], then tap notification
tone you want to change, and then tap
[Done].
❖
Information
･
If you mark [Notification vibration] checkbox in Step
3, Software update is notified by vibration.
Downloading software to update
Software can be downloaded wirelessly
directly from your terminal via the Internet by
using mobile network connection or by using
a Wi-Fi network connection.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Update Center].
2
Tap [System] tab and then .
･
The terminal searches for software
updates.
❖
Information
･
You can also search the software update in the
following operation.
From the Home screen, tap and , then tap
[Settings]
u
[About phone]
u
[Software
update]
u
[System] and then tap .
･
"New apps"/"Updates" tabs in the Update Center
screen are not available because the services are not
provided in Japan.
❖
Note
･
For software update via mobile network, a high
packet communication charge will be applied
because of a large amount data communication. For
this reason, subscription of packet flat-rate service is
highly recommended.
･
While you are using roaming service overseas, you
cannot search for or download update software
through the mobile network.
Updating the latest software
automatically
You can update the latest software update
automatically on regular basis. If software
update is searched, appears on the status
bar.
1
From the Home screen, tap ,
then tap [Update Center].
2
Tap and [Settings].
3
Tap [Allow automatic updates],
read the notes and tap [OK].
Downloading software updates
wirelessly
243
Appendix/Index
❖
Note
･
Note that if you tap from the Home screen, then
tap [Update Center] and then tap
[Settings]
u
[Preffered data traffic] and then select [Via
mobile network/Wi-Fi] in the Preffered data traffic
screen, a Wi-Fi connection automatically switches to
mobile network communications when the Wi-Fi
connection is unstable and packet communication
fee may apply.
･
Note that packet communication fee may apply for
searching automatically.
You can update software by using PC
Companion that can be installed into a PC
from the terminal.
❖
Information
･
To install PC Companion on a PC, an Internet
connection is required.
When PC Companion is not installed
on your PC
1
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable.
2
When "PC Companion software"
screen appears on the terminal,
tap [Install].
･
Installer of PC Companion starts on the
PC.
3
Follow the onscreen instructions
on the PC to install.
･
After installation, PC Companion starts
on the PC. If further software update is
searched, it is automatically notified.
Follow the onscreen instructions on the
PC.
When PC Companion is installed on
your PC
1
Check if PC Companion is activated
on the PC. If not, activate PC
Companion from the Start menu.
2
Connect the terminal to a PC using
a microUSB cable.
3
Follow the onscreen instructions
on the PC.
･
If available software update is found, it
is automatically notified.
Connecting to a PC and
updating
244
Appendix/Index
■
The terminal
Main specification
Product name
SO-02E
Size
Approx. 115mm (H)
×
approx. 54mm (W)
×
approx. 9.4mm (T)
(Thickest part : Approx.
9.4mm)
Weight
Approx. 95g (with battery)
Storage
ROM 8GB
RAM 1GB
External storage
Compatible with microSD
card of up to 2GB, and
microSDHC card of up to
32GB (as of July, 2012).
Continuous
stand-by
time
FOMA/3G
Approx. 360 hrs.
(stationary)
GSM
Approx. 280 hrs.
(stationary)
LTE
Approx. 240 hrs.
(stationary)
Continuous
call time
FOMA/3G
Approx. 350 min.
GSM
Approx. 360 min.
Charging
time
AC Adapter
03
Approx. 150 min.
DC Adapter
03
Approx. 160 min.
1Seg watching time
Approx. 320 min.
Display Type
TFT16,777,216 colors
Size
Approx. 3.7 inches
Number of
dots
Width 540 dots
×
Height 960 dots
Image
pickup
device
Type
Camera : CMOS
Front camera : CMOS
Size
Camera: 1/4.0 inches
Front camera :
1/13.0 inches
Camera pixels
Camera :
Effective pixels : Approx.
8,100,000 pixels (Recorded
pixels : Approx. 8,000,000
pixels)
Front camera :
Effective pixels : Approx.
310,000 pixels (Recorded
pixels : Approx. 310,000
pixels)
Digital zoom
Camera : Max. 16x (41
levels)
Front camera :
―
Still image capture size
Camera : 3264
×
2448
(8MP 4:3)
3264
×
1836
（
6MP 16:9
）
1632
×
1224 (2MP 4:3)
1920
×
1080 (2MP 16:9)
Front camera :
640
×
480
（
VGA
）
245
Appendix/Index
*1 Not available when docomo mini UIM card is not
inserted.
*2 It is confirmed that the terminal and all Bluetooth
devices are compliant with Bluetooth standards
designated by Bluetooth SIG, and they are
authenticated. However, procedures may differ or
data transfer may not be possible depending on the
device's characteristics or specifications.
*3 May vary by the signal status and/or whether there
is an interference between communications
devices.
*4 Bluetooth standards for Bluetooth device
connection procedure according to the product's
applications.
･
Continuous call time is an estimate of the
operation time for calling when radio signal
reception is normal.
･
Continuous stand-by time is an estimate of
the stand-by time when radio signal
reception is normal.
In certain circumstances, the stand-by time
may drop to as low as half the time shown
due to the battery charge, function settings,
temperature, or radio signal reception in the
area (no reception or weak).
･
A use of the Internet reduces the actual call
(communication)/stand-by time.
Composing messages or activating the
camera or applications also reduces call
(communication)/stand-by time even if you
do not call or use the Internet.
･
Stationary continuous stand-by time is the
estimated average operation time when radio
signal reception is normal.
･
Moving continuous stand-by time is the
estimated average operation time when the
terminal remains in the combined conditions
of "stationary" or "moving" in a service area
when radio signal reception is normal and the
condition of "out of area".
Video recording size
Video camera :
1920
×
1080 (Full HD)
1280
×
720 (HD 720p)
640
×
480 (VGA)
Front video camera :
640
×
480 (VGA)
320
×
240
（
QVGA
）
Frame rate
Max. 30 fps
Wireless LAN
Compliant with
IEEE802.11a
*1
/b/g/n
(Corresponding frequency
band to IEEE802.11n :
2.4GHz/5GHz)
Bluetooth Supported
Bluetooth
version
Compliant with Bluetooth
standard Ver. 3.1
*2
Radio power
Bluetooth standard Power
Class 1
Available
communication
distance
*3
Within approx. 10 m
Supported
Bluetooth
profile
*4
A 2 D P, AVR C P, H F P, H I D,
H S P, O P P, PA N , P B A P, S P P
246
Appendix/Index
･
Charging time is an estimate of the time
required to charge a completely empty
battery pack.
■
Battery Pack
■
File format
The terminal supports the display or
playback of the following file format:
* Still images are saved in JPEG format when shot with
Camera in the terminal.
■
Numbers of still images (Estimation)
* Number of images shot with a resolution of 2MP.
■
Time length of shooting video
(Estimation)
* Time of recording with a resolution of 640
×
480
(VGA).
Product
name
Battery Pack SO06
Battery type
Lithium Ion Battery
Voltage
DC3.7V
Current
1500mAh
Type File format
Sound
WAV (PCM, G.711) (.wav), AAC (.3gp, .m4a,
.mp4), AAC+ (.3gp, .m4a, .mp4), eAAC+
(.3gp, .m4a, .mp4), MP3 (.mp3), AMR-NB
(.3gp), AMR-WB (.3gp), MIDI (SP-MIDI/GM/
GML (.mid), XMF (.xmf ), Mobile XMF 1.0
(.mxmf ), RTTTL/RTX (.rtttl, .rtx), OTA (.ota),
iMelody (.imy)), Ogg Vorbis (.ogg), FLAC
(.flac), PIFF (.isma)
Still
image
*
JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg), GIF (.gif), PNG (.png), BMP
(.bmp), WEBP (.webp)
Video
H263 (.3gp, .mp4), H264 AVC (.3gp, .mp4),
MPEG-4 SP (.3gp), VP8 (.webm, .mkv), Xvid
(.avi), Quicktime (.mov), PIFF (.ismv)
Savable number of shot
images to the internal
storage
Up to approx. 5800
images
Savable number of shot
images to a microSD card
(1GB)
Up to approx. 1600
images
Savable time of
recording to the
internal storage
Per video : Up to approx.
249 min.
In total : Up to approx. 249
min.
Savable time of
recording to a microSD
card (1GB)
Per video : Up to approx. 67
min.
In total : Up to approx. 67
min.
247
Appendix/Index
Software delivered with this device and its
media is owned by Sony Mobile
Communications AB, and/or its affiliated
companies and its suppliers and licensors.
Sony Mobile grants you a non-exclusive
limited licence to use the Software solely in
conjunction with the Device on which it is
installed or delivered. Ownership of the
Software is not sold, transferred or otherwise
conveyed.
Do not use any means to discover the source
code or any component of the Software,
reproduce and distribute the Software, or
modify the Software. You are entitled to
transfer rights and obligations to the
Software to a third party, solely together with
the Device with which you received the
Software, provided the third party agrees in
writing to be bound by the terms of this
Licence.
This licence exists throughout the useful life
of this Device. It can be terminated by
transferring your rights to the Device to a
third party in writing.
Failure to comply with any of these terms and
conditions will terminate the licence
immediately.
Sony Mobile and its third party suppliers and
licensors retain all rights, title and interest in
and to the Software. To the extent that the
Software contains material or code of a third
party, such third parties shall be beneficiaries
of these terms.
This licence is governed by the laws of
Sweden. When applicable, the foregoing
applies to statutory consumer rights.
In the event Software accompanying or
provided in conjunction with your device is
provided with additional terms and
conditions, such provisions shall also govern
your possession and usage of the Software.
End User Licence
Agreement
End User Licence Agreement
248
Appendix/Index
This product includes certain open source or
other software originating from third parties
that is subject to the GNU General Public
License (GPL), GNU Library/Lesser General
Public License (LGPL) and different and/or
additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and
notices. The exact terms of GPL, LGPL and
some other licenses, disclaimers and notices
are reproduced in the about box in this
product and are also available at http://
opensource.sonymobile.com.
Sony Mobile offers to provide source code of
software licensed under the GPL or LGPL or
some other open source licenses allowing
source code distribution to you on a CD-ROM
for a charge covering the cost of performing
such distribution, such as the cost of media,
shipping and handling, upon written request
to Sony Mobile Communications AB, Open
Source Software Management, Nya
Vattentornet, SE-221 88 Lund, Sweden. This
offer is valid for a period of three (3) years
from the date of the distribution of this
product by Sony Mobile.
This product and its accessories may be
covered and controlled by Japan's export
control regulations ("Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law" and related laws and
regulations). If you wish to export this
product and/or its accessories, you must
complete the necessary procedures at your
own responsibility and cost. For details about
the procedure, contact the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry.
About Open Source
Software
About Open Source Software
Export Controls and
Regulations
249
Appendix/Index
About the Copyright and Portrait
rights
Copyrighted contents you recorded or
obtained from sites or Internet home pages
using this product by downloading or other
means, such as documents, images, music
data, software, are prohibited from
reproduction, transformation and
transmission over public lines without
consent of the copyright holders, unless
intended for personal use or any other
purpose permitted by law.
Note that some performances, shows, and
exhibitions may not allow photography,
movie shooting, or sound recording even for
personal use.
You should also refrain from taking a picture
of other people and disclosing it by such
means as posting it on a site on the Internet
without their consent because of possible
infringement of their right of portrait.
Trademarks
The company names and product names
appearing in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
･
"FOMA", "i-mode", "i-
α
ppli", "Deco-mail", "sp-
mode", "WORLD WING", "WORLD CALL",
"ToruCa", "mopera", "mopera U", "iD", "Xi" and
logo of "ToruCa" are trademarks or registered
trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, INC.
･
"Bluetooth" is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. INC., and Sony Mobile
Communications is licensed to use them.
･
"Wi-Fi" is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
･
Wi-Fi Protected Setup and Wi-Fi Protected
Setup logos are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
･
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Mark is a mark of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
･
"Catch Phone (Call waiting service)" is a
registered trademark of Nippon Telegraph
and Telephone Corporation.
･
Rovi, G-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE
and their logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks in Japan of
U.S. Rovi Corporation and/or its affiliates.
Intellectual Property Right
250
Appendix/Index
･
"Xperia", "Timescape" and "Live Ware" are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony
Mobile Communications AB.
･
"Media Go" is a trademark or registered
trademark of Sony Media Software and
Services.
･
"PlayStation" and " " are trademarks or
registered trademarks or Sony Computer
Entertainment
Inc.
･
"BRAVIA", "Sony", "Sweep Multi Angle", "Sweep
Panorama", "WALKMAN", "xLOUD", "FeliCa" and
"Reader" are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
･
"POBox" and "POBox"
logo are registered
trademarks of Sony
Computer Science Laboratories, Inc.
"POBox" is a co-developed technology of
Sony Computer Science Laboratories, Inc. and
Sony Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.
･
microSD logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.
･
is a registered trademark of FeliCa
Networks, Inc.
･
FeliCa is a contactless IC card technology
developed by Sony Corporation.
･
"Twitter" is a trademark or registered
trademark of Twitter, Inc.
･
"Google" and "Google" logo, "Android" and
"Android" logo, "Google Play" and "Google
Play" logo, "Google+", "Gmail", "mobile Google
Maps", "Google Talk", "Google Latitude",
"Google Calendar", "YouTube" and "YouTube"
logo and "Picasa" are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Google, Inc.
･
"Facebook" is a trademark or registered
trademark of Facebook, Inc.
･
mixi and mixi logo are registered trademarks
of mixi, Inc.
･
DLNA is a trademark or registered
trademark of the Digital Living
Network Alliance.
･
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and
High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
･
"Microsoft", "Windows", "Outlook", "Windows
Vista", "Windows Server", "Windows Media"
and "ActiveSync" are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
･
This product contains technology subject to
certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft. Use or distribution of this
technology outside of this product is
prohibited without the appropriate license(s)
from Microsoft.
251
Appendix/Index
･
Content owners use Microsoft PlayReady
™
content access technology to protect their
intellectual property, including copyrighted
content. This device uses PlayReady
technology to access PlayReady-protected
content and/or WMDRM-protected content.
If the device fails to properly enforce
restrictions on content usage, content owners
may require Microsoft to revoke the device's
ability to consume PlayReady-protected
content. Revocation should not affect
unprotected content or content protected by
other content access technologies. Content
owners may require you to upgrade
PlayReady to access their content. If you
decline an upgrade, you will not be able to
access content that requires the upgrade.
･
This product is licensed under the MPEG-4
visual and AVC patent portfolio license for the
personal and non-commercial use of a
consumer for (i) encoding video in
compliance with the MPEG-4 visual standard
("MPEG-4 video") or the AVC standard ("AVC
video") and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 or AVC
video that was encoded by a consumer
engaged in a personal and non-commercial
activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide
MPEG-4 and/or AVC video. No license is
granted or shall be implied for any other use.
Additional information including that relating
to promotional, internal and commercial uses
and licensing may be obtained MPEG LA,
L.L.C. ("See http://www.mpegla.com "). MPEG
Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed
from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
･
Other product and company names
mentioned herein may be the trademarks of
their respective owners.
In context, TM and
®
mark are omitted.
･
Any rights not expressly granted herein are
reserved. All other trademarks are property of
their respective owners.
252
Appendix/Index
This terminal supports SIM unlock. If you
release SIM lock, you can use SIM by a carrier
other than NTT DOCOMO.
･
The SIM unlock service is provided at a
docomo Shop.
･
A SIM unlock charge is separately required.
･
If you use a SIM other than by DOCOMO, LTE
system is not available. Available services and
functions will be limited. DOCOMO is not
liable to any failures or malfunctions.
･
For details of SIM unlock, refer to NTT
DOCOMO website.
SIM unlock
253
Appendix/Index
A
About phone
････････････････････････ 148
Access point
Block access point change
････････････ 123
Initializing
･････････････････････････ 124
Setting
････････････････････････････ 122
Accessibility
･････････････････････････ 148
Account setting
Facebook
･･････････････････････････ 136
Google
･･･････････････････････････ 134
Removing
･････････････････････････ 137
Accounts & sync
･･････････････････････ 134
Auto-sync
･････････････････････････ 137
Adjusting sound volume
･･･････････････ 125
Airplane mode
･･･････････････････････ 118
Alarm & clock
････････････････････････ 215
Setting alarm
･･････････････････････ 216
Album
･･････････････････････････････ 195
Anshin Scan
･･････････････････････････ 71
Application screen
･････････････････････ 66
Group
･･････････････････････････ 74, 75
Learning
･･･････････････････････････ 66
Recommends
････････････････････ 66, 76
Switching
･･････････････････････････ 76
Applications
･･････････････････････････ 66
Adding to Home screen
･･･････････････ 73
Icon
･･･････････････････････････････ 67
Managing
･････････････････････････ 131
Searching
･･････････････････････････ 75
Sorting
････････････････････････････ 73
Uninstalling
･････････････････ 65, 73, 132
Applications button
･････････････････ 60, 66
Apps
･･･････････････････････････････ 131
Audible touch tones
･･･････････････････ 126
AUTO-GPS
･･･････････････････････････ 134
Auto-rotate screen
･････････････････････ 38
B
Backlight
Turning off
･････････････････････30, 127
Turning on
･････････････････････31, 148
Backup & reset
･･･････････････････････ 146
Battery
･･････････････････････････････ 131
Battery level
･･････････････････････27, 148
Battery pack
･･････････････････････････ 25
Bluetooth
･･･････････････････････････ 156
Pair setting
････････････････････････ 157
Phone name
･･･････････････････････ 157
Bluetooth keyboard
････････････････････ 59
Book Store MyShelf
････････････････････ 71
Bookmark
･･･････････････････････････ 111
Bookmarking a web page
････････････ 111
Editing
････････････････････････････ 111
Opening
･･････････････････････････ 111
Brightness
･･･････････････････････････ 127
C
Calculator
････････････････････････････ 69
Calendar
････････････････････････････ 213
Creating schedule
･･･････････････････ 213
Viewing schedule
･･･････････････････ 214
Call
･･････････････････････････････････ 77
Index
254
Appendix/Index
Declining
････････････････････････ 79, 80
Ending a call
････････････････････････ 78
Hold
･･･････････････････････････････ 81
Making
･････････････････････････ 77, 80
Mute
･･････････････････････････････ 81
Receiving
･･･････････････････････ 78, 80
Speaker
････････････････････････････ 81
Call forwarding service
･･････････････････ 84
Call history
･･･････････････････････････ 82
Adding to Phonebook
････････････････ 83
Deleting
･･･････････････････････････ 83
Making a call
････････････････････････ 83
Call notification
････････････････････････ 84
Call settings
･･･････････････････････84, 125
Call Waiting
･･･････････････････････････ 84
Caller ID display request service
･･････････ 84
Caller ID notification
････････････････････ 84
Camera
･････････････････････････････ 175
Face detection
･････････････････････ 180
Front camera
･･･････････････････････ 182
Front video camera
･････････････････ 189
Quick launch
･･･････････････････････ 179
Recording videos
･･･････････････････ 189
Settings (still camera)
････････････････ 185
Settings (video camera)
･･････････････ 190
Shooting still pictures
･･･････････････ 178
Smile detection
････････････････････ 181
Sweep Multi Angle
･･････････････････ 183
Sweep Panorama
･･･････････････････ 183
3D Sweep Panorama
････････････････ 183
Character entry
････････････････････････ 40
Character mode
･･･････････ 43, 46, 49, 51
Input method
･････････････ 43, 46, 49, 51
Settings
････････････････････････････ 53
Charging
･････････････････････････････ 26
Using a PC
･･････････････････････････ 29
Using AC adapter
････････････････････ 28
Using DC adapter
････････････････････ 28
Chat
････････････････････････････････ 106
Checkbox
････････････････････････････ 39
Connected devices (Media server)
･･･････ 159
Contact Picker 2.3
･･････････････････････ 58
Contacts
･････････････････････････････ 68
D
Data synchronization
Auto-sync
･････････････････････････ 137
Data usage
･･････････････････････････ 117
Date & time
･･････････････････････････ 146
Developer options
････････････････････ 148
Device
･･････････････････････････････ 125
Dial
･････････････････････････････････ 67
Disaster kit
･･･････････････････････････ 68
Display
･･････････････････････････････ 127
dmarket
･････････････････････････････ 161
dmenu
･･････････････････････････････ 161
docomo backup
･･･････････････････････ 67
docomo mini UIM card
･･･････････････ 18, 23
PIN
･･･････････････････････････････ 141
docomo service
･･････････････････････ 134
Download
････････････････････････････ 70
E
Ear speaker volume
････････････････････ 81
Early Warning "Area Mail"
･･･････････････ 107
eBook Reader by Sony
･･････････････････ 69
eco mode
････････････････････････････ 72
Email
････････････････････････････････ 99
Deleting
･･････････････････････････ 102
255
Appendix/Index
Forwarding
････････････････････････ 102
Initial settings
･･･････････････････････ 99
Receiving
･････････････････････････ 101
Replying
･･････････････････････････ 102
Saving attachment file
･･･････････････ 102
Sending
･･･････････････････････････ 100
Email account
Adding
･･･････････････････････････ 104
Changing
･････････････････････････ 103
Deleting
･･････････････････････････ 104
Emergency call
････････････････････････ 77
English guidance
･･････････････････････ 84
F
Facebook
････････････････････････････ 136
FM radio
････････････････････････････ 174
Foursquare
･･････････････････････････ 204
G
G-GUIDE Program table
･････････････････ 68
Gmail
･･･････････････････････････････ 106
Google
･････････････････････････････ 134
Google Maps
･････････････････････････ 209
Current location
････････････････････ 210
Directions
･････････････････････････ 211
Google Latitude
････････････････････ 212
Layers
････････････････････････････ 211
Street View
････････････････････････ 210
Google Talk
･･････････････････････････ 106
Google+
･････････････････････････････ 71
GPS function
･････････････････････････ 207
Enabling GPS function
･･･････････････ 209
Enabling Wireless networks
･･･････････ 209
H
Handwriting input
･････････････････････ 51
HDMI
･･･････････････････････････････ 200
HighlightCam
･････････････････････････ 71
Home application
･･･････････････････ 60, 76
Home screen
･･････････････････････････ 60
Adding
････････････････････････････ 64
Deleting
･･･････････････････････････ 64
Folder
･････････････････････････････ 63
Group
･････････････････････････････ 64
Kisekae
････････････････････････････ 63
Learning
･･･････････････････････････ 60
List
････････････････････････････････ 61
Shortcut
････････････････････････ 61, 65
Sorting
････････････････････････････ 65
Wallpaper
･･････････････････････････ 63
Widget
･････････････････････････ 62, 65
I
IC Tag/Barcode Reader
･･････････････････ 69
i-channel
･････････････････････････････ 67
i-concier
･････････････････････････････ 67
Index character
････････････････････････ 38
Infrared communication
･･･････････････ 153
Infrared data port
････････････････ 22, 153
Initial settings
･････････････････････････ 31
Internal storage
･･････････････････････ 129
Format
････････････････････････････ 130
International call
･･･････････････････････ 78
International roaming
･･････････････････ 72
International roaming service
･･･････････ 222
International roaming setting
･･･････････ 228
IrDA (Infrared communication)
･･････････ 153
256
Appendix/Index
J
Japanese syllabary keyboard
･････････････ 49
K
Keys
･････････････････････････････････ 36
Kisekae
･･････････････････････････････ 63
Koe-no-Takuhaibin
･････････････････････ 84
L
Landscape view
･･･････････････････････ 38
Language & input
･････････････････････ 145
Let's start PSM
･････････････････････････ 69
Light sensor
･･････････････････････････ 22
Link
････････････････････････････････ 110
Location services
････････････････ 138, 207
Location-based Wi-Fi
･･････････････････ 122
M
Machi-chara
･･････････････････････････ 67
Map Application
･･･････････････････････ 71
Media Go
････････････････････････････ 153
Media Player
･････････････････････････ 201
Play list
･･･････････････････････････ 203
Playback
･･････････････････････････ 201
Memo
･･･････････････････････････････ 69
Message (SMS)
････････････････････････ 96
Deleting message
････････････････････ 98
Deleting thread
･････････････････････ 98
New registration of contact
････････････ 97
Receiving
･･････････････････････････ 97
Sending
････････････････････････････ 96
Setting
･････････････････････････････ 98
Messenger
･･･････････････････････････ 71
MHL
････････････････････････････････ 200
microSD card
･････････････････････24, 129
Format
････････････････････････････ 130
microUSB cable
･･･････････････････････ 149
Missed call
････････････････････････････ 83
mixi
････････････････････････････････ 204
Mobile BRAVIA Engine
･････････････････ 127
mopera U
･･･････････････････････････ 124
mopera U Mail
･･･････････････････････ 105
Movies
･･･････････････････････････････ 69
Moving data
･････････････････････････ 149
Music Unlimited
･･･････････････････････ 68
My profile
････････････････････････････ 91
N
Name card creator
･････････････････････ 71
Network connection settings
････････････ 112
Network mode
･･･････････････････････ 226
Network service
･･･････････････････････ 84
Notification icon
･･･････････････････････ 33
Notification LED
･･･････････････････････ 36
Notification panel
･･････････････････････ 35
Notification ringtone
･･････････････････ 126
Nuisance call blocking service
････････････ 84
O
OfficeSuite
･･････････････････････････ 221
Omakase Lock
････････････････････････ 138
Online dictionary
･･････････････････････ 57
Osaifu-Keitai
･････････････････････････ 163
Osaifu-Keitai Lock Settings
･･･････････ 165
Own number
･･････････････････ 6, 91, 148
257
Appendix/Index
P
PC Companion
･･････････････････ 150, 242
Personal
････････････････････････････ 134
Personal Unblocking Key (PUK code)
･････ 141
Phone language
･･････････････････････ 145
Phonebook
･･･････････････････････････ 85
Accounts to display
･･････････････････ 88
Adding a new entry
･･････････････････ 86
Combining
･････････････････････････ 90
Communication
･････････････････････ 85
Contacts display order
････････････････ 87
Deleting
･･･････････････････････････ 90
Editing
･････････････････････････････ 89
Exporting
･･････････････････････････ 94
Favorites
･･･････････････････････････ 89
Groups
････････････････････････････ 88
Importing
･･･････････････････････ 94, 95
Infrared
････････････････････････････ 92
Making a call
････････････････････････ 87
My profile
･･････････････････････････ 91
Ringtone
･･･････････････････････････ 90
Searching
･･････････････････････････ 87
Sending
････････････････････････････ 92
Setting photo
･･･････････････････････ 89
TimeLine
･･･････････････････････････ 85
Phonebook list screen
･･････････････････ 85
Phonepad keyboard
････････････････････ 43
PIN code
････････････････････････････ 140
Play Movies
･･･････････････････････････ 71
Play Store
･･･････････････････････････ 162
Deleting
･･････････････････････････ 163
Installing
･･････････････････････････ 162
Playing video
････････････････････････ 197
POBox Touch User Guide
････････････････ 59
Preferred apps settings
･････････････60, 133
Proximity sensor
･･･････････････････････ 22
Q
QWERTY keyboard
･････････････････････ 46
R
Radio button
･･････････････････････････ 39
Recent calls screen
･････････････････････ 82
Recording videos
･････････････････････ 189
Remote operation settings
･･････････････ 84
Remote support
･･･････････････････････ 70
Reset
･･･････････････････････････････ 146
Ringtone setting
･･････････････････････ 126
Ringtone volume
･･････････････････79, 125
S
Schedule
･････････････････････････････ 69
Screen lock
･･･････････････････････30, 142
Changing
･････････････････････････ 143
Setting
････････････････････････････ 142
Unlocking
･････････････････････････ 143
Screen lock setting
････････････････････ 128
Screenshot
･･･････････････････････････ 38
SD card backup
･･･････････････････････ 219
Searching
････････････････････････････ 39
Voice search
････････････････････････ 39
Second call settings
････････････････････ 84
Security
･････････････････････････････ 138
Security code
Network security code
･･･････････････ 140
Personal Unblocking Key (PUK code)
･･･ 141
PIN code
･･････････････････････････ 140
Setting menu
････････････････････････ 112
258
Appendix/Index
Setup guide
･･････････････････････････ 31
Shabette concier
･･･････････････････････ 67
Shabette-Key-Nyuryoku
･････････････････ 40
Shooting still pictures
･････････････････ 178
Silent mode
･･････････････････････････ 126
SIM card lock
･････････････････････････ 141
Software keyboard
･････････････････････ 41
Software update
･･････････････････････ 240
Sound
･･････････････････････････････ 125
Specific Absorption Rate of Mobile Phone
････････････････････････････････････ 246
Specification
･････････････････････････ 243
sp-mode
････････････････････････････ 124
sp-mode mail
･････････････････････････ 96
Status bar
････････････････････････････ 33
Status icon
･･･････････････････････････ 33
Stereo Headset with Microphone
････････････････････････････ 80, 174, 194
Stopwatch
･･･････････････････････････ 218
Storage
･････････････････････････････ 129
System
･･････････････････････････････ 146
T
Tethering
････････････････････････････ 120
USB tethering
･･････････････････････ 120
Wi-Fi tethering
･････････････････････ 121
Theme
･･････････････････････････････ 127
Timer
･･･････････････････････････････ 218
Timescape
･･･････････････････････････ 204
Filter
･････････････････････････････ 205
Setting
･･･････････････････････ 204, 207
Tile
･･･････････････････････････････ 205
ToruCa
･･････････････････････････････ 166
Touch screen
･･････････････････････････ 37
Drag
･･･････････････････････････････ 37
Flick
･･･････････････････････････････ 37
Pinch
･･････････････････････････････ 37
Scroll
･･････････････････････････････ 37
Tap
････････････････････････････････ 37
Touch and hold
･･････････････････････ 37
Transferring data
･････････････････････ 149
Troubleshooting
･･････････････････････ 231
Turning power on/off
･･･････････････････ 30
Twitter
･･･････････････････････････71, 204
U
Update Center
･･･････････････････････ 240
USB connection
･･･････････････････29, 149
USB keyboard
･････････････････････････ 59
USB storage
･･････････････････････････ 129
Format
････････････････････････････ 130
User dictionary
････････････････････････ 56
English user dictionary
････････････････ 56
Japanese user dictionary
･･････････････ 56
User dictionary settings
･････････････････ 56
Backing up and restoring
･･････････････ 57
V
Vibration
････････････････････ 98, 126, 216
Video Unlimited
･･･････････････････････ 68
Viewing photos
･･････････････････････ 196
Voice mail service
･･････････････････････ 84
VPN
････････････････････････････････ 119
W
WALKMAN
････････････････････････････ 68
Wallpaper
････････････････････････････ 63
Web browser
･････････････････････････ 108
Adding a tab
･･･････････････････････ 109
259
Appendix/Index
Adjusting settings
･･････････････････ 110
Closing
･･･････････････････････････ 109
Copying text
･･･････････････････････ 109
Displaying
･････････････････････････ 109
Exiting
････････････････････････････ 109
Going back to the previous page
･･････ 108
Moving
･･･････････････････････････ 108
Opening
･･････････････････････････ 108
Searching text
･･････････････････････ 109
Setting home page
･･････････････････ 110
Switching tabs
･････････････････････ 109
Zooming in/out
････････････････････ 109
Web history
･･････････････････････････ 111
Wi-Fi
･･･････････････････････････････ 112
Sleep policy
･･･････････････････････ 116
Wi-Fi Direct
･･････････････････････････ 122
Wireless & networks
･･･････････････････ 112
Word suggestion
･･････････････････････ 55
Words by learning
･････････････････････ 56
WORLD CALL
･････････････････････････ 78
World clock
･･････････････････････････ 217
WORLD WING
････････････････････････ 222
X
xLOUD
･･････････････････････････････ 125
Xperia
･･････････････････････････････ 133
Xperia Chinese keyboard
････････････････ 40
Xperia Japanese keyboard
･･･････････････ 40
Setting
･････････････････････････････ 53
Xperia keyboard
･･･････････････････････ 40
Xperia Start Up
････････････････････････ 70
Y
YouTube
････････････････････････････ 198
Numerics
1Seg
････････････････････････････68, 167
Initial settings
･･････････････････････ 168
TVlink
････････････････････････････ 171
Watching program
･･････････････････ 169
1Seg antenna cable
･････････････････ 167
Don't forget your mobile phone ... or your manners!
Remember to be courteous to others when you use your terminal.
Turn the power off when you are:
■
In places where use is prohibited
Be sure to switch the power off in an aircraft or a
hospital.
* Turn off your terminal even in hospital lobbies
and waiting rooms as well as hospital wards if
electronic medical devices may be in use near
you.
■
In crowded places such as peak-hour trains if
implanted electronic medical devices may be in
use near you
Radio waves emitted by the terminal may
adversely affect implanted pacemakers and ICDs
when used in close proximity.
■
Driving
Using a handheld mobile phone while driving will
result in a penalty.
However, absolutely necessary cases such as
rescue of a sick person or maintaining public's
safety are exempted.
■
In places such as theaters, cinemas, and art
galleries
Using the terminal in a public place, where you
need to be quiet, annoys people around you.
Keep your voice and ring tone down
■
Keep your voice down in quiet places like
restaurants and hotel lobbies.
■
If you are in an outdoor public place, make sure
you do not disturb others.
Respect privacy
Please be considerate of the privacy of
individuals around you when taking and
sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
Have good manners
The terminal is equipped with useful functions
not to answer an incoming call or to mute the
sound.
【
Vibrate
】
(P.126)
Vibrates when there is an incoming call.
【
Silent mode
】
(P.126)
Silent mode mutes the sounds of the terminal such
as the keypad sounds and the ring tone.
* Shutter sound cannot be muted.
You can also use optional services such as the
Voice Mail Service (P.84) and Call Forwarding
Service (P.84).
Make various applications or charge your billing plan, check your charges and points, and more online.
sp-mode: dmenu
⇒
"
お客様サポートへ
(To Customer support)
"
⇒
"
各種お申込・お手続き
(Various applications/procedures)
"
PC: My docomo (http://www.mydocomo.com/)
⇒ 各種お申込
・
お手続き
(Various applications/procedures)
(In Japanese only)
* When using with sp-mode, "Network security code" is required.
* When using with sp-mode, you may be charged.
* "docomo ID and password" are required for use.
*
Please contact "General Inquiries" described on the last page of this manual if you forget or do not have "docomo ID and password".
* May not be available in some cases depending on the conditions of your subscription.
* There are cases where the site may not be available due to system maintenance, etc.
Sales: NTT DOCOMO, INC.
Manufacturer: Sony Mobile
Communications Japan, Inc
’13.01 (1st Edition) 1270-5847.1
General Inquiries
<docomo Information Center>
0120-005-250 (toll free)
*Service available in: English, Portuguese, Chinese, Spanish, Korean.
*Unavailable from part of IP phones.
(Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m.)
■From DOCOMO mobile phones (In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 151 (toll free)
*Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.
■From land-line phones (In Japanese only)
0120-800-000 (toll free)
*Unavailable from part of IP phones.
(Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m. (open all year round))
●Please confirm the phone number before you dial.
●For Applications or Repairs and After-Sales Service, please contact the above-mentioned information center or the docomo
Shop etc. near you on the NTT DOCOMO website.
NTT DOCOMO website http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/
Loss or theft of terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas
<docomo Information Center>
(available 24 hours a day)
From DOCOMO mobile phones
Failures encountered overseas
<Network Support and Operation Center>
(available 24 hours a day)
From DOCOMO mobile phones
International call access code
for the country you stay -81-3-6832-6600* (toll free)
*
You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a land-line phone, etc.
*If you use SO-02E, you should dial the number +81-3-6832-6600
(to enter '＋', touch and hold '0').
From land-line phones
<Universal number>
Universal number international
prefix -8000120-0151*
*You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for
the country you stay.
*For international call access codes for major countries and universal number
international prefix, refer to DOCOMO International Services website.
●If you lose your terminal or have it stolen, immediately take
the steps necessary for suspending the use of the terminal.
●
If the terminal you purchased is damaged, bring your terminal
to a repair counter specified by DOCOMO after returning to Japan.
Don’t forget your mobile phone
・・・
or your manners!
٧When using your mobile phone in a public place, don’t forget to
show common courtesy and consideration for others around you.
-81-3-6718-1414* (toll free)
International call access code
for the country you stay
*
You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a land-line phone, etc.
*If you use SO-02E, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414
(to enter '＋', touch and hold '0').
From land-line phones
<Universal number>
Repairs
■From DOCOMO mobile phones (In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 113 (toll free)
*Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.
■From land-line phones (In Japanese only)
0120-800-000 (toll free)
*Unavailable from part of IP phones.
(Business hours: 24 hours (open all year round))
Samples
■Sony Mobiles Communications Japan, Inc
Inquiries: Customer support center (In Japanese only)
0120-111-156
Available also from
mobile phones, IP phones.
From part of IP phones, 0466-31-2516
●Please confirm the phone number before you dial.
(Business hours: Weekdays 10:00 to 18:00,
Saturday/Sunday/National holidays 10:00 to 17:00)
Website http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/ (In Japanese only)
-8005931-8600*
Universal number international
prefix
*You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the call rate for
the country you stay.
*For international
call access codes for major
countries and universal number
international prefix, refer to DOCOMO International Services website.
We collect old phones, etc. regardless of brands and
manufacturers. Bring them to your nearest docomo Shop.
*
Items to be collected: mobile phones, PHS, battery packs,
chargers, desktop holders (regardless of brands and manufacturers)
Li-ion 00